Motorola Solutions 89FT7066 Portable 2-Way Radio User Manual MOTOTRBO Professional Digital Two Way Radio System

Motorola Solutions, Inc. Portable 2-Way Radio MOTOTRBO Professional Digital Two Way Radio System

Manual

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO

MOTOTRBO™

XPR 755 0/XPR 7580/

XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e

COLOR DISPLAY PORTABLE

USER GUIDE

Contents

Declaration of Conformity....................... 15

Important Safety Information........17

Software Version............................18

Computer Software Copyrights....19

Handling Precautions.................... 20

Getting Started............................... 21

How to Use This Guide..................................21

What Your Dealer/System Administrator

Can Tell You.............................................21

Preparing Your Radio for Use.......23

Charging the Battery......................................23

Attaching the Battery..................................... 23

Attaching the Antenna................................... 24

Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 25

Attaching the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)............................................. 25

Powering Up the Radio..................................27

Adjusting the Volume.....................................27

Identifying Radio Controls............ 29

Radio Controls...............................................29

Using the 4–Way Navigation Button..............30

Using the Keypad.......................................... 31

Non-Connect Plus Operations......33

Additional Radio Controls

in Non-Connect Plus

Mode.................................... 34

Contents

English

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................34

Programmable Buttons....................... 34

Assignable Radio Functions.....35

Assignable Settings or Utility

Functions............................ 38

Accessing the Programmed

Functions....................................... 38

Identifying Status Indicators................39

Display Icons............................39

Call Icons................................. 42

Advanced Menu Icons..............42

Mini Notice Icons......................43

Sent Item Icons ....................43

Bluetooth Device Icons............ 44

Job Tickets Icons..................... 44

LED Indicator........................... 44

Alert Tones...............................46

Indicator Tones........................ 46

Switching Between Conventional

Analog and Digital Mode................46

IP Site Connect ...............................47

Capacity Plus ..................................48

Linked Capacity Plus ...................... 48

Making and Receiving Calls

in Non-Connect Plus

Mode.................................... 50

Selecting a Zone.................................50

Selecting a Channel............................51

Receiving and Responding to a

Radio Call...................................... 51

Receiving and Responding

to a Group Call....................52

Receiving and Responding

to a Private Call .............. 53

Receiving an All Call ............... 53

Receiving and Responding

to a Selective Call ........... 54

Receiving and Responding

to a Phone Call ............... 54

Making a Radio Call............................56

Making a Group Call................ 57

Making a Private Call ...........58

Making an All Call ................... 59

Making a Selective Call ....... 59

Contents

English

Making a Phone Call with

the One Touch Access

Button..................................60

Making a Private Call with a

One Touch Call Button........62

Making a Group, Private or

All Call with the

Programmable Number

Key ..................................63

Making a Phone Call with

the Programmable

Phone Button .................. 64

Making a Call with the

Programmable Manual

Dial Button ...................... 66

Stopping a Radio Call .....................68

Talkaround..........................................69

Monitoring Features............................69

Monitoring a Channel...............70

Permanent Monitor...................70

Advanced Features in Non-

Connect Plus Mode............ 71

Radio Check....................................... 71

Sending a Radio Check........... 71

Remote Monitor.................................. 72

Initiating Remote Monitor......... 73

Stopping Remote Monitor........ 74

Scan Lists........................................... 75

Viewing an Entry in the

Scan List............................. 75

Viewing an Entry in the

Scan List by Alias Search... 75

Editing the Scan List................ 76

Scan....................................................80

Starting and Stopping Scan..... 80

Responding to a

Transmission During a

Scan....................................81

Deleting a Nuisance Channel...81

Restoring a Nuisance

Channel...............................82

Vote Scan ....................................... 82

Contact Settings..................................82

Making a Group Call from

Contacts..............................83

Making a Private Call from

Contacts ..........................84

Making a Phone Call from

Contacts..............................85

Contents

English

Making a Call Alias Search

.........................................88

Making a Group, Private,

Phone or All Call by Alias

Search ................................89

Assigning an Entry to a

Programmable Number

Key ..................................90

Removing the Association

between Entry and

Programmable Number

Key ..................................91

Adding a New Contact............. 92

Setting a Default Contact .....93

Call Indicator Settings.........................93

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Call Alert

.........................................93

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Private

Calls ................................94

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Selective

Call ..................................94

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Text

Message............................. 95

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for

Telemetry Status with

Text..................................... 96

Assigning Ring Styles.............. 97

Selecting a Ring Alert Type......97

Configuring Vibrate Style......... 98

Escalating Alarm Tone

Volume................................99

Call Log Features................................99

Viewing Recent Calls............... 99

Storing an Alias from a Call

List.................................... 100

Deleting a Call from a Call

List.................................... 100

Viewing Details from a Call

List.................................... 101

Call Alert Operation...........................101

Receiving and Responding

to a Call Alert.................... 101

Making a Call Alert from the

Contact List....................... 102

Contents

English

Making a Call Alert with the

One Touch Access

Button................................102

Emergency Operation.......................103

Receiving an Emergency

Alarm.................................104

Responding to an

Emergency Alarm............. 104

Exiting Emergency Mode

After Receiving the

Emergency Alarm............. 105

Sending an Emergency

Alarm.................................105

Sending an Emergency

Alarm with Call.................. 106

Sending an Emergency

Alarm with Voice to

Follow ........................... 107

Reinitiating an Emergency

Mode................................. 108

Exiting Emergency Mode

After Sending the

Emergency Alarm............. 108

Man Down.........................................109

Turning the Man Down

Feature On or Off..............109

Analog Message Encode ..............110

Sending MDC Message

Encode to Dispatcher........110

Text Message Features ................... 111

Writing and Sending a Text

Message........................... 111

Sending a Quick Text

Message with the One

Touch Access Button........ 112

Accessing the Drafts Folder...113

Managing Fail-to-Send Text

Messages..........................115

Managing Sent Text

Messages..........................117

Receiving a Text Message.....120

Managing Received Text

Messages..........................121

Job Tickets........................................125

Accessing the Job Ticket

Folder................................126

Logging In and Out of the

Remote Server..................126

Creating and Sending a Job

Ticket................................ 127

Responding to the Job Ticket.128

Deleting a Job Ticket..............128

Contents

English

Privacy ..........................................129

Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 131

Multi-Site Controls ........................ 131

Starting an Automatic Site

Search...............................131

Stopping an Automatic Site

Search...............................132

Starting a Manual Site

Search...............................133

Security.............................................134

Radio Disable.........................134

Radio Enable..........................135

Lone Worker..................................... 137

Password Lock Features.................. 138

Accessing the Radio from

Password.......................... 138

Unlocking the Radio from

Locked State..................... 139

Turning the Password Lock

On or Off........................... 139

Changing the Password.........140

Bluetooth Operation..........................141

Turning Bluetooth On and

Off..................................... 141

Finding and Connecting to a

Bluetooth Device...............142

Finding and Connecting

from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).........143

Disconnecting from a

Bluetooth Device...............143

Switching Audio Route

between Internal Radio

Speaker and Bluetooth

Device............................... 144

Viewing Device Details...........144

Editing Device Name..............144

Deleting Device Name........... 145

Bluetooth Mic Gain.................145

Permanent Bluetooth

Discoverable Mode........... 146

Notification List..................................146

Accessing the Notification

List.................................... 146

Auto-Range Transponder System

(ARTS) .....................................147

Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 147

Wi-Fi Operation.................................148

Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........148

Connecting to a Network

Access Point..................... 148

Refreshing the Network List...149

Contents

English

Adding a Network...................150

Viewing Details of Network

Access Points................... 150

Removing Network Access

Points................................ 151

Utilities.............................................. 152

Locking and Unlocking the

Keypad..............................152

Turning Keypad Tones On

or Off................................. 152

Setting the Squelch Level...... 153

Setting the Power Level......... 154

Turning the Option Board

Feature(s) On or Off..........154

Identifying Cable Type........... 154

Turning the Voice Operating

Transmission (VOX)

Feature On or Off..............155

Setting the Display Backlight

Timer.................................156

Turning the Backlight Auto

On or Off........................... 157

Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 157

Setting the Tone Alert

Volume Offset Level..........158

Turning the Talk Permit

Tone On or Off.................. 158

Turning the Power Up Alert

Tone On or Off.................. 159

Setting the Text Message

Alert Tone......................... 160

Changing the Display Mode...160

Adjusting the Display

Brightness......................... 161

Language............................... 162

Turning the LED Indicator

On or Off........................... 162

Turning the Introduction

Screen On or Off...............163

Turning the Voice

Announcement On or Off.. 163

Setting the Text-to-Speech

Feature..............................164

Call Forwarding ..................166

Menu Timer............................166

Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

A)...................................... 167

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 167

Switching Audio Route

between Internal Radio

Contents

English

Speaker and Wired

Accessory......................... 168

Intelligent Audio......................168

Turning the Acoustic

Feedback Suppressor

Feature On or Off ..........169

Turning the Microphone

Dynamic Distortion

Control Feature On or Off. 170

Setting the Audio Ambience...171

Setting the Audio Profiles.......172

Turning GPS/GNSS On or

Off..................................... 172

Text Entry Configuration........ 173

Flexible Receive List.............. 179

Accessing General Radio

Information........................ 182

Front Panel Configuration

(FPC)................................ 185

Checking the RSSI Values.....186

Connect Plus Operations............ 187

Additional Radio Controls

in Connect Plus Mode...... 188

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............188

Programmable Buttons..................... 188

Assignable Radio Functions...189

Assignable Settings or Utility

Functions.......................... 190

Identifying Status Indicators in

Connect Plus Mode..................... 191

Display Icons..........................191

Call Icons............................... 193

Advanced Menu Icons............193

Sent Item Icons ..................... 194

Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 194

LED Indicator......................... 195

Indicator Tones...................... 196

Alert Tones.............................196

Switching Between Connect Plus

and Non-Connect Plus Modes.....196

Making and Receiving Calls

in Connect Plus Mode...... 197

Selecting a Site.................................197

Contents

English

Roam Request....................... 197

Site Lock On/Off.....................197

Site Restriction.......................197

Selecting a Zone...............................198

Using Multiple Networks................... 199

Selecting a Call Type........................199

Receiving and Responding to a

Radio Call.................................... 199

Receiving and Responding

to a Group Call..................200

Receiving and Responding

to a Private Call.................200

Receiving a Site All Call.........201

Receiving an Inbound

Private Phone Call............ 201

Receiving an Inbound

Phone Talkgroup Call....... 202

Inbound Phone Multi-Group

Call....................................203

Making a Radio Call..........................203

Making a Call with the

Channel Selector Knob..... 203

Making a Private Call with a

One Touch Call Button......206

Making a Call with the

Programmable Manual

Dial Button........................ 206

Making an Outbound Private

Phone Call with the

Programmable Manual

Dial Button........................ 207

Making an Outbound Private

Phone Call via the Phone

Menu................................. 208

Making an Outbound Private

Phone Call from Contacts. 208

Waiting for the Channel

Grant in an Outbound

Private Phone Call............ 209

Making a Buffered Over-Dial

in a Connected

Outbound Private Phone

Call....................................210

Making a Live Over-Dial in a

Connected Outbound

Private Phone Call............ 210

Advanced Features in

Connect Plus Mode.......... 212

Auto Fallback.................................... 212

Indications of Auto Fallback

Mode................................. 212

Contents

English

Making/Receiving Calls in

Fallback Mode...................212

Returning to Normal

Operation.......................... 213

Radio Check..................................... 213

Sending a Radio Check......... 214

Remote Monitor................................ 214

Initiating Remote Monitor....... 215

Scan..................................................216

Starting and Stopping Scan... 216

Responding to a

Transmission During a

Scan..................................216

User Configurable Scan....................217

Turning Scan On or Off.....................217

Editing the Scan List......................... 218

Add or Delete a Group via the Add

Members Menu............................219

Understanding Scan Operation.........221

Scan Talkback.................................. 222

Contacts Settings..............................222

Making a Private Call from

Contacts............................223

Making a Call Alias Search.... 224

Adding a New Contact........... 224

Call Indicator Settings.......................225

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Call Alert .225

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Private

Calls.................................. 226

Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Text

Message........................... 226

Selecting a Ring Alert Type....227

Configuring Vibrate Style....... 228

Escalating Alarm Tone

Volume..............................229

Call Log Features..............................229

Viewing Recent Calls............. 229

Deleting a Call from a Call

List.................................... 229

Viewing Details from a Call

List.................................... 230

Call Alert Operation...........................230

Receiving and Responding

to a Call Alert.................... 230

Making a Call Alert from the

Contact List....................... 231

Making a Call Alert with the

One Touch Access

Button................................232

Emergency Operation.......................232

Contents

English

Receiving an Incoming

Emergency........................234

Saving the Emergency

Details to the Alarm List.... 234

Deleting the Emergency

Details............................... 235

Responding to an

Emergency Call.................235

Responding to an

Emergency Alert............... 235

Initiating an Emergency Call.. 236

Initiating an Emergency Call

with Voice to Follow.......... 236

Initiating an Emergency Alert. 237

Exiting Emergency Mode....... 237

Man Down Alarms.............................238

Turning Man Down Alarms

On and Off........................ 239

Resetting the Man Down

Alarms...............................241

Beacon Feature................................ 242

Turning Beacon On and Off... 242

Resetting the Beacon.............243

Text Message Features.................... 244

Writing and Sending a Text

Message........................... 244

Sending a Quick Text

Message........................... 245

Sending a Quick Text

Message with the One

Touch Access Button........ 246

Accessing the Drafts Folder...246

Managing Fail-to-Send Text

Messages..........................248

Managing Sent Text

Messages..........................250

Receiving a Text Message.....254

Reading a Text Message....... 254

Managing Received Text

Messages..........................254

Privacy.............................................. 257

Making a Privacy-Enabled

(Scrambled) Call............... 259

Security.............................................259

Radio Disable.........................259

Radio Enable..........................260

Password Lock Features.................. 262

Accessing the Radio from

Password.......................... 262

Turning the Password Lock

On or Off........................... 263

Unlocking the Radio from

Locked State..................... 263

Contents

English

Changing the Password.........264

Bluetooth Operation..........................265

Turning Bluetooth On and

Off..................................... 265

Finding and Connecting to a

Bluetooth Device...............266

Finding and Connecting

from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).........267

Disconnecting from a

Bluetooth Device...............267

Switching Audio Route

between Internal Radio

Speaker and Bluetooth

Device............................... 268

Viewing Device Details...........268

Editing Device Name..............268

Deleting Device Name........... 269

Bluetooth Mic Gain.................269

Permanent Bluetooth

Discoverable Mode........... 270

Notification List..................................270

Accessing the Notification

List.................................... 270

Wi-Fi Operation.................................271

Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........271

Connecting to a Network

Access Point..................... 271

Refreshing the Network List...272

Adding a Network...................273

Viewing Details of Network

Access Points................... 273

Removing Network Access

Points................................ 274

Utilities.............................................. 275

Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 275

Turning Keypad Tones On

or Off................................. 275

Setting the Tone Alert

Volume Offset Level..........276

Turning the Talk Permit

Tone On or Off.................. 277

Turning the Power Up Alert

Tone On or Off.................. 277

Setting the Power Level......... 278

Changing the Display Mode...278

Adjusting the Display

Brightness......................... 279

Setting the Display Backlight

Timer.................................280

Turning the Introduction

Screen On or Off...............280

Contents

English

Locking and Unlocking the

Keypad..............................281

Language............................... 282

Turning the LED Indicator

On or Off........................... 282

Identifying Cable Type........... 283

Voice Announcement.............283

Menu Timer............................284

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 284

Intelligent Audio......................285

Turning the Acoustic

Feedback Suppressor

Feature On or Off..............286

Turning the Microphone

Dynamic Distortion

Control Feature On or Off. 287

Turning GPS/GNSS On or

Off..................................... 287

Text Entry Configuration........ 288

Accessing General Radio

Information........................ 294

Accessories..................................306

Authorized Accessories

List..................................... 307

Antennas...........................................307

Batteries............................................307

Carry Devices................................... 308

Chargers........................................... 308

Earbuds and Earpieces.....................309

Headsets and Headset Accessories.309

Remote Speaker Microphones......... 310

Surveillance Accessories..................310

Miscellaneous Accessories...............311

Maritime Radio Use in the VHF

Frequency Range...............................312

Special Channel Assignments.....................312

Emergency Channel......................... 312

Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 312

Operating Frequency Requirements............312

Declaration of Compliance for the Use of

Distress and Safety Frequencies............315

Technical Parameters for Interfacing

External Data Sources............................315

Batteries and Chargers Warranty......... 316

The Workmanship Warranty........................316

Contents

English

The Capacity Warranty................................316

Limited Warranty....................................317

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION

PRODUCTS........................................... 317

I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS

AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 317

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 318

III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................318

IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.318

V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT

COVER:..................................................319

VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE

PROVISIONS:........................................ 319

VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................321

Contents

English

Declaration of Conformity

This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.

Declaration of Conformity

Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)

Responsible Party

Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc.

Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.

Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744

Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: XPR 7550/XPR 7580/XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e

conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)

Declaration of Conformity

English

Class B Digital Device

As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with

Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant

to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency

energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.

Declaration of Conformity

English

Appareil numérique de Classe B

En tant que périphérique d'ordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux stipulations de la partie 15 des rè-

glements de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :

1Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférence nuisible.

2Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonction-

nement indésirable.

Remarque

Ce matériel a fait l'objet de tests et a été déclaré conforme aux limites établies pour un appareil numérique

de classe B, comme il est stipulé à la section 15 des règlements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixées afin

d'offrir une protection suffisante contre des interférences nuisibles dans une installation résidentielle. Ce

matériel génère, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie radiofréquence et, s'il n'est pas installé ni utilisé confor-

mément aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant,

on ne peut garantir qu'il n'y aura aucune interférence dans une installation particulière.

Si cet appareil cause une interférence nuisible de la réception de la radio ou de la télévision, ce qui peut

être déterminé en éteignant et en allumant l'appareil, vous êtes encouragé à remédier à la situation en

prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

• Réorienter ou déplacer l'antenne réceptrice.

•Augmenter la distance entre l'équipement et le récepteur.

• Brancher l'appareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit différent de celui du récepteur.

• Consulter un revendeur ou un technicien radio/télévision chevronné pour obtenir de l'aide.

Déclaration de conformité

Français

(Canada)

Important Safety Information

RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide

for Portable Two-Way Radios

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only.

Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure

and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way

Radios which contains important operating

instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness

and control for Compliance with applicable standards

and Regulations.

For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries,

and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com

Any modification to this device, not expressly

authorized by Motorola, may void the user’s authority

to operate this device.

Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio

transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a

type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the

transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential

radio interference to other users, the antenna type

and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent

isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than

that necessary for successful communication.

This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry

Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna

with the maximum permissible gain and required

antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated.

Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain

greater than the maximum gain indicated for that

type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.

Important Safety Information

English

Consignes de sécurité importantes

Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition

aux radiofréquences et sécurité du produit

ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit être utilisée qu'à des fins

professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le

guide Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition

aux radiofréquences et sécurité du produit, qui

contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement

pour une utilisation sécuritaire et des informations sur

l'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques, dans le

but d’assurer votre conformité aux normes et

règlements en vigueur.

Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des

antennes, des batteries et des autres accessoires

approuvés par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com

Toute modification effectuée à cet appareil sans

l'autorisation explicite de Motorola peut annuler

l'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil.

Selon la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet

émetteur radio ne peut être utilisé qu'avec une

antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal)

sont approuvés par Industrie Canada pour cet

émetteur. Afin de limiter les interférences radio pour

les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne

doivent être choisis de façon à ce que la puissance

isotrope rayonnée équivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas

plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour établir la

communication.

Cet émetteur radio a été approuvé par Industrie

Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuvée

par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autorisé et

l'impédance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqué. Il

est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout

type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et

présentant un gain supérieur au maximum indiqué

pour le type.

Consignes de sécurité importantes

English

Software Version

All the features described in the following sections are

supported by the software version R02.50.00 or later.

See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug

Version on page 183 to determine the software

version of your radio.

Check with your dealer or system administrator for

more details of all the features supported.

Software Version

English

Version logicielle

Toutes les fonctions décrites dans les sections

suivantes sont prises en charge par la version

R02.50.00 ou les versions ultérieures du logiciel de la

radio.

Consultez la section Checking the Firmware Version

and Codeplug Version pour connaître la version

logicielle de votre radio.

Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements à propos

des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous à

votre détaillant ou à votre administrateur de système.

Version logicielle

English

Computer Software Copyrights

The Motorola products described in this manual may

include copyrighted Motorola computer programs

stored in semiconductor memories or other media.

Laws in the United States and other countries

preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for

copyrighted computer programs including, but not

limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in

any form the copyrighted computer program.

Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer

programs contained in the Motorola products

described in this manual may not be copied,

reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or

distributed in any manner without the express written

permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of

Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either

directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any

license under the copyrights, patents or patent

applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of

law in the sale of a product.

The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied in

this product is protected by intellectual property rights

including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets

of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for

use within this Communications Equipment. The user

of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from

attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or

disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way

convert the Object Code into a human-readable form.

U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.

Computer Software Copyrights

English

Handling Precautions

The MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meets

IP57 specifications, allowing the radio to withstand

adverse field conditions such as being submersed in

water.

• If the radio has been submersed in water, shake

the radio well to remove any water that may be

trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone

port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio

performance.

• If the radio’s battery contact area has been

exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts

on both the radio and the battery before attaching

the battery to the radio. The residual water could

short-circuit the radio.

• If the radio has been submersed in a corrosive

substance (e.g. saltwater), rinse the radio and

battery in fresh water then dry the radio and

battery.

• To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use a

diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and

fresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to one

gallon of water).

• Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio

chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows

for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so

may create a leak path into the radio and the

radio’s submersibility may be lost.

• Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a

label.

• Ensure that no oily substances come in contact

with the vent.

• The radio with antenna attached properly is

designed to be submersible to a maximum depth

of 1 meter (3.28 feet) and a maximum submersion

time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum

limit or use without antenna may result in damage

to the radio.

• When cleaning the radio, do not use a high

pressure jet spray on the radio as this will exceed

the 1 meter depth pressure and may cause water

to leak into the radio.

Caution:

Do not disassemble the radio. This could

damage radio seals and result in leak paths

into the radio. Radio maintenance should only

be done in service depot that is equipped to

test and replace the seal on the radio.

Handling Precautions

English

Getting Started

How to Use This Guide

This User Guide covers the basic operation of the

MOTOTRBO Portables.

However, your dealer or system administrator may

have customized your radio for your specific needs.

Check with your dealer or system administrator for

more information.

Throughout this publication, the icons described next

are used to indicate features supported in either the

conventional Analog mode or conventional Digital

mode:

Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-

Only feature.

Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-

Only feature.

For features that are available in both conventional

Analog and Digital modes, no icon is shown.

Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are not

available in Connect Plus mode of operation. See

Connect Plus Operations on page 187 for more

information.

For features that are available in a conventional multi-

site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 47 for more

information.

Selected features are also available on the single-site

trunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on

page 48 for more information.

Selected features are also available in the multi-site

trunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See Linked

Capacity Plus on page 48 for more information.

What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can

Tell You

You can consult your dealer or system administrator

about the following:

• Is your radio programmed with any preset

conventional channels?

• Which buttons have been programmed to access

other features?

•What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Getting Started

English

• What are the best radio usage practices for

effective communication?

• What maintenance procedures will help promote

longer radio life?

Getting Started

English

Preparing Your Radio for Use

Charging the Battery

For best performance, your radio is powered by a

Motorola-approved Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) or

Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage and to

ensure compliance with warranty terms, charge the

battery using a Motorola charger exactly as described

in the charger user guide. It is recommended your

radio remains powered off while charging.

Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial use

for best performance.

Attaching the Battery

Note:

If user inadvertently attaches a UL battery to

an FM approved radio or vice versa, the

certification on the radio will be voided. Your

radio can be preprogrammed via CPS to alert

you if this battery mismatch occurs. Check

with your dealer or system administrator to

determine how your radio has been

programmed. This battery mismatch alert

feature is only applicable for IMPRES battery

and Non-IMPRES battery with kit number

programmed in Erasable Programmable Read

Only Memory (EPROM).

When the radio is attached with the wrong

battery, a low pitched warning tone sounds,

the LED lights up blinking red, display shows

Wrong Battery and the Voice

Announcement/Text-to-Speech sounds Wrong

Battery if the Voice Announcement/Text-to-

Speech is loaded via CPS.

1Align the battery with the rails on the back of the

radio. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwards

until the latch snaps into place. Slide battery latch

into lock position.

Preparing Your Radio for Use

English

2To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move the

battery latch ( ) into unlock position and hold, and

slide the battery down and off the rails.

Attaching the Antenna

Caution:

If antenna needs to be replaced, ensure that

only MOTOTRBO antennas are used.

Neglecting this will damage your radio.

1With the radio turned off, set the antenna in its

receptacle and turn clockwise.

2To remove the antenna, turn the antenna

counterclockwise.

Preparing Your Radio for Use

English

Attaching the Belt Clip

1To attach the belt clip, align the grooves on the

clip with those on the battery and press downward

until you hear a click.

2To remove the belt clip, press the belt clip tab

away from the battery using a key. Then slide the

clip upward and away from the radio.

Attaching the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)

The universal connector ( ) is located on the

antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect

MOTOTRBO accessories to the radio.

Insert the hooked end of the cover into the slots

above the universal connector. Press downward on

the cover to seat the lower tab properly into the RF

connector.

Turn the thumbscrew clockwise to secure the

connector cover to the radio.

Preparing Your Radio for Use

English

To remove the universal connector cover, press down

on the cover and turn the thumbscrew

counterclockwise.

Replace the dust cover when the universal connector

is not in use.

If the radio is exposed to water, dry the universal

connector before attaching an accessory or replacing

the dust cover.

If the radio is exposed to salt water or contaminants,

perform the following cleaning procedure.

1Mix one tablespoon of mild dishwashing detergent

with one gallon of water to produce a 0.5 percent

solution.

2Clean only the external surfaces of the radio with

the solution. Apply the solution sparingly with a

stiff, nonmetallic, short-bristled brush.

3Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft and lint-free

cloth. Ensure the contact surface of the universal

connector is clean and dry.

4Apply Deoxit Gold Cleaner or Lubricant Pen

(Manufacturer CAIG Labs, Part number G100P)

on the contact surface of the universal connector.

5Attach an accessory to the universal connector to

test the connectivity.

Note:

Do not submerge the radio in water. Ensure

excess detergent does not get trapped in

between the universal connector, controls, or

crevices.

Clean the radio once a month for maintenance. For a

harsher environment such as in petrochemical plants

or in a high salt density marine environment, clean

the radio more often.

Preparing Your Radio for Use

English

Powering Up the Radio

Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise

until you hear a click. You see MOTOTRBO (TM) on the

display of the radio momentarily, followed by a

welcome message or welcome image.

The LED lights up solid green ( ) and the Home

screen lights up if the backlight setting is set to turn

on automatically.

A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up test

is successful.

Note:

There is no power up tone if the radio tones/

alerts function is disabled (see Turning the

Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 157).

Turn off the radio by rotating this knob

counterclockwise until you hear a click. You see a

brief Powering Down on the display of the radio.

Adjusting the Volume

Increase the volume by turning the On/Off/Volume

Control Knob clockwise.

Decrease the volume by turning this knob

counterclockwise.

Preparing Your Radio for Use

English

Note:

Your radio can be programmed to have a

minimum volume offset where the volume

level cannot be lowered past the programmed

minimum volume. Check with your dealer or

system administrator for more information.

Preparing Your Radio for Use

English

Identifying Radio Controls

Radio Controls

1Channel Selector Knob

2On/Off/Volume Control Knob

3LED Indicator

4Side Button 1[1]

5Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button

6Side Button 2[1]

7Side Button 3[1]

8Front Button P1[1]

9Menu/OK Button

10 4-Way Navigation Button

11 Keypad

12 Back/Home Button

13 Front Button P2[1]

14 Display

15 Microphone

16 Speaker

17 Universal Connector for Accessories

18 Emergency Button[1]

19 Antenna

1These buttons are programmable.

Identifying Radio Controls

English

Using the 4–Way Navigation Button

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , to

scroll through options, increase/decrease values, and

navigate vertically.

Category Direction

or or

Menu Vertical Naviga-

tion

Lists Vertical Naviga-

tion

View Details Vertical Naviga-

tion

Previous/Next

Item

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , as

a number, alias, or free form text editor.

Editor Catego-

Direction

or or

Number - Left : Delete last

digit

Right : -

Alias - -

Free Form Text Move cursor up/

down

Move cursor

one character

right/left

Numeric Values Increase/

Decrease

Move cursor

one character

right/left

Identifying Radio Controls

English

Using the Keypad

You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to enter

subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The next

table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 . , ? ! @ & ' % — : * #

A B C 2

D E F 3

G H I 4

J K L 5

M N O 6

P Q R S 7

T U V 8

Identifying Radio Controls

English

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

W X Y Z 9

0Note:

Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off

the CAPS lock.

* or

del Note:

Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.

# or

space Note:

Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”. Long

press to change text entry method.

Identifying Radio Controls

English

Non-Connect Plus Operations

English

Additional Radio Controls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button

The PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) serves

two basic purposes:

• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows

the radio to transmit to other radios in the call.

Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the

PTT button to listen.

The microphone is activated when the PTT button

is pressed.

• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is

used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call

on page 56).

If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit

Tone On or Off on page 158) or the PTT Sidetone

is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before

talking.

During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature

is enabled on your radio (programmed by your

dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment

the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call)

releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is

free for you to respond.

You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, if

your call is interrupted, indicating that you should

release the PTT button, for example when the radio

receives an Emergency Call.

Programmable Buttons

Your dealer can program the programmable buttons

as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the

duration of a button press:

Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Long press Pressing and holding for the

programmed duration.

Press and hold Keeping the button pressed.

Note:

The programmed duration of a button press is

applicable for all assignable radio/utility

functions or settings. See Emergency

Operation on page 103 for more information

on the programmed duration of the

Emergency button.

Assignable Radio Functions

Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the

preferred audio profile.

Audio Routing Toggles audio routing

between internal and external

speakers.

Audio Toggle Toggles audio routing

between the internal radio

speaker and the speaker of

wired accessory.

Bluetooth® Audio

Switch

Toggles audio routing

between internal radio

speaker and external

Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Call Alert Provides direct access to the

contacts list for you to select a

contact to whom a Call Alert

can be sent.

Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on or

off.

Call Log Selects the call log list.

Contacts Provides direct access to the

Contacts list.

Emergency Depending on the

programming, initiates or

cancels an emergency.

Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or

off.

Manual Dial Depending on the

programming, initiates a

Private or Phone Call by

keying in any subscriber ID or

phone number.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Manual Site

Roam[2]

Starts the manual site search.

Mic AGC On/Off Toggles the internal

microphone automatic gain

control (AGC) on or off.

Monitor Monitors a selected channel

for activity.

Notifications Provides direct access to the

Notifications list.

Nuisance Channel

Delete[2]

Temporarily removes an

unwanted channel, except for

the Selected Channel, from

the scan list. The Selected

Channel refers to the selected

zone or channel combination

of the user from which scan is

initiated.

One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined

Private, Phone or Group Call,

a Call Alert or a Quick Text

message.

Option Board

Feature

Toggles option board

feature(s) on or off for option

board-enabled channels.

Permanent Monitor Monitors a selected channel

for all radio traffic until function

is disabled.

Phone Provides direct access to the

Phone Contacts list.

Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.

Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID.

Radio Check Determines if a radio is active

in a system.

Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be

remotely enabled.

Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be

remotely disabled.

Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a

target radio without it giving

any indicators.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Repeater/

Talkaround[2]

Toggles between using a

repeater and communicating

directly with another radio.

Scan[2] Toggles scan on or off.

Site Info Displays current Linked

Capacity Plus site name and

ID. Plays site announcement

voice messages for the

current site (this function is

unavailable when Voice

Announcement is disabled).

Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radio

searches the current site only.

When toggled off, the radio

searches other sites in

addition to the current site.

Status Selects the status list menu.

Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a

local or remote radio.

Text Message Selects the text message

menu.

Transmit Interrupt

Remote Dekey

Stops the transmission of a

remote monitored radio

without giving any indicators,

or an ongoing interruptible call

to free the channel.

Trill Enhancement

On/Off

Toggles trill enhancement on

or off.

Voice

Announcement for

Channel

Plays zone and channel

announcement voice

messages for the current

channel. This function is

unavailable when Voice

Announcement is disabled.

Voice

Announcement

On/Off

Toggles voice announcement

on or off.

Voice Operating

Transmission

(VOX)

Toggles VOX on or off.

Zone Allows selection from a list of

zones.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on

or off.

Backlight Toggles display backlight on or

off.

Backlight

Brightness

Adjusts the brightness level.

Display Mode Toggles the day/night display

mode on or off.

Keypad Lock Toggles keypad between

locked and unlocked.

Power Level Toggles transmit power level

between high and low.

Accessing the Programmed Functions

You can access various radio functions through one

of the following ways:

• A short or long press of the relevant

programmable buttons.

• Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:

Press to access the menu. Press the

appropriate Menu Scroll button ( or ) to

access the menu functions.

2To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press

the button.

3To go back one menu level, or to return to the

previous screen, press the button. Long

press the button to return to the Home

screen.

Note:

Your radio automatically exits the menu

after a period of inactivity and returns to

your Home screen.

2Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Identifying Status Indicators

Display Icons

The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display

(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,

and menu entries.

The following are icons that appear on the display of

the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar,

arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and

are channel specific.

Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI)

The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four

bars indicate the strongest signal. This

icon is only displayed while receiving.

Monitor

Selected channel is being monitored.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth feature is enabled but

there is no remote Bluetooth device con-

nected.

Bluetooth Connected

The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The

icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth

device is connected.

Radio is signed in to the remote server.

Sign Out

Radio is signed out of the remote server.

High Volume Data

Radio is receiving high volume data and

channel is busy.

Job Ticket Notification

Notification List has items to review.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

or Power Level

Radio is set at Low power or Radio is

set at High power.

Tones Disable

Tones are turned off.

Option Board

The Option Board is enabled.

Option Board Non-Function

The Option Board is disabled.

Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

Indicates time left before automatic re-

start of radio.

GPS/GNSS Available

The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The

icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-

able.

GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of

Range

The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but

is not receiving data from the satellite.

Scan[3][4]

Scan feature is enabled.

Scan- Priority 1[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group

designated as Priority 1.

Scan- Priority 2[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group

designated as Priority 2.

Vote Scan

Vote scan feature is enabled.

Flexible Receive List

Flexible receive list is enabled.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Emergency

Radio is in Emergency mode.

Secure

The Privacy feature is enabled.

Unsecure

The Privacy feature is disabled.

Site Roaming[3]

The site roaming feature is enabled.

Talkaround[3][4]

In the absence of a repeater, radio is

currently configured for direct radio to ra-

dio communication.

Battery

The number of bars (0 – 4) shown indi-

cates the charge remaining in the bat-

tery. Blinks when the battery is low.

Wi-Fi Excellent[5]

Wi-Fi signal is excellent.

Wi-Fi Good[5]

Wi-Fi signal is good.

Wi-Fi Average[5]

Wi-Fi signal is average.

Wi-Fi Poor[5]

Wi-Fi signal is poor.

Wi-Fi Unavailable[5]

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.

3Not applicable in Capacity Plus

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Call Icons

The following icons appear on the radio’s display

during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts

list to indicate ID type.

Private Call

Indicates a Private Call in progress. In

the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number).

Group Call/All Call

Indicates a Group Call or All Call in

progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a group alias (name) or ID

(number).

Phone Call as Private Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call

in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a phone alias (name) or ID

(number).

Phone Call as Group/All Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Group/All

Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it

indicates a group alias (name) or ID

(number).

Bluetooth PC Call

Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-

ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a

Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID

(number).

Advanced Menu Icons

The following icons appear beside menu items that

offer a choice between two options or as an indication

that there is a sub-menu offering two options.

4Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus

5Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Checkbox (Empty)

Indicates the option is not selected.

Checkbox (Checked)

Indicates the option is selected.

Solid Black Box

Indicates the option selected for the menu

item with a sub-menu.

Mini Notice Icons

The following icons appear momentarily on the

radio’s display after an action to perform task is

taken.

Successful Transmission (Posi-

tive)

Successful action taken.

Failed Transmission (Negative)

Failed action taken.

Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional)

Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or

Failed Transmission.

Sent Item Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner of

the radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.

Sent Successfully

The text message is sent successfully.

Send Failed

The text message has not been sent.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

In-Progress

• The text message to a group alias or ID

is pending transmission.

• The text message to a subscriber alias

or ID is pending transmission, followed

by waiting for acknowledgement.

Bluetooth Device Icons

The following icons also appear next to items in the

list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate

the device type.

Bluetooth Data Device

Bluetooth-enabled data device, such

as a scanner.

Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth-enabled audio device,

such as a headset.

Bluetooth PTT Device

Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such

as a PTT-Only Device (POD).

Job Tickets Icons

All Jobs

Indicates all jobs listed.

New Jobs

Indicates new jobs.

LED Indicator

The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status of

your radio.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Blinking

red

Battery mismatch occurs or radio is

transmitting at low battery condition,

receiving an emergency transmission

or has failed the self-test upon

powering up, or has moved out of

range if radio is configured with Auto-

Range Transponder System.

Solid

yellow

Radio is monitoring a conventional

channel or in Bluetooth Discoverable

Mode.

Blinking

yellow

Radio is scanning for activity or

receiving a Call Alert, flexible receive

list is enabled or all local Linked

Capacity Plus channels are busy.

Double

blinking

yellow

Radio is no longer connected to the

repeater while in Capacity Plus or

Linked Capacity Plus; all Capacity Plus

or Linked Capacity Plus channels are

currently busy. Auto Roaming is

enabled, radio is actively searching for

a new site. Also indicates that radio

has yet to respond to a group call alert,

or radio is locked.

Solid

green

Radio is powering up or transmitting.

Blinking

green

Radio is powering up, receiving a non-

privacy-enabled call or data, or

detecting activity, or retrieving Over-

the-Air Programming transmissions

over the air.

Double

blinking

green

Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled

call or data.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Note:

While in conventional mode, when the LED

blinks green, it indicates the radio detects

activity over the air. Due to the nature of the

digital protocol, this activity may or may not

affect the radio's programmed channel.

For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus,

there is no LED indication when the radio is

detecting activity over the air.

Alert Tones

Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the

status, or response to data received on the radio.

Continuous Tone A monotone sound.

Sounds continuously un-

til termination.

Periodic Tone Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration

set by the radio. Tone

starts, stops, and repeats

itself.

Repetitive Tone A single tone that re-

peats itself until it is ter-

minated by the user.

Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a

short period of time de-

fined by the radio.

Indicator Tones

High pitched tone Low pitched tone

Positive Indicator Tone

Negative Indicator Tone

Switching Between Conventional Analog and

Digital Mode

Each channel in your radio can be configured as a

conventional analog or conventional digital channel.

Use the Channel Selector Knob ( ) to switch

between an analog or a digital channel.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

When switching from digital to analog mode, certain

features are unavailable. Icons for the digital features

(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing

‘grayed out’. Disabled features are hidden in the

menu.

Your radio also has features available in both analog

and digital mode. However, the minor differences in

the way each feature works does not affect the

performance of your radio.

Note:

Your radio also switches between digital and

analog modes during a dual mode scan (see

Scan on page 80).

IP Site Connect

This feature allows your radio to extend conventional

communication beyond the reach of a single site, by

connecting to different available sites which are

connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.

When the radio moves out of range from one site and

into the range of another, it connects to the new site's

repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.

Depending on your settings, this is done

automatically or manually.

If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans

through all available sites when the signal from the

current site is weak or when the radio is unable to

detect any signal from the current site. It then locks

on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal

Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.

In a manual site search, the radio searches for the

next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but

which may not have the strongest signal) and locks

on to it.

Note:

Each channel can only have either Scan or

Roam enabled, not both at the same time.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a

particular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s)

in the roam list during the automatic roam operation

to locate the best site.

A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels

(including the Selected Channel).

Note:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to

the roam list. Check with your dealer or

system administrator for more information.

Capacity Plus

Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of

the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of

channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254

Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently

utilize the available number of programmed channels

while in Repeater Mode.

You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access

a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a

programmable button press.

Your radio also has features that are available in

conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, Capacity

Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor

differences in the way each feature works does not

affect the performance of your radio.

Check with your dealer or system administrator for

more information on this configuration.

Linked Capacity Plus

Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channel

trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio

system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and

IP Site Connect configurations.

Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extend

trunking communication beyond the reach of a single

site, by connecting to different available sites which

are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It

also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently

utilizing the combined available number of

programmed channels supported by each of the

available sites.

When the radio moves out of range from one site and

into the range of another, it connects to the new site's

repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.

Depending on your settings, this is done

automatically or manually.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans

through all available sites when the signal from the

current site is weak or when the radio is unable to

detect any signal from the current site. It then locks

on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal

Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.

In a manual site search, the radio searches for the

next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but

which may not have the strongest signal) and locks

on to it.

Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled can

be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches

these channels during the automatic roam operation

to locate the best site.

Note:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to

the roam list. Check with your dealer or

system administrator for more information.

Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features not

applicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available

in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you

try to access a feature not applicable to Linked

Capacity Plus via a programmable button press.

Check with your dealer or system administrator for

more information on this configuration.

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode

Selecting a Zone

A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up

to 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of

160 channels per zone.

1Access the Zone feature.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Zone button

Press the programmed Zone

button.

Radio menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Zone and press

to select.

The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

2Select the required zone.

Radio

Con-

trol

Steps

or or and scroll to the required

zone.

Key-

pad 1Enter the first character of the re-

quired zone.

2A blinking cursor appears allowing

you to continue entering the subse-

quent characters of the required

zone.

Note:

Press to move one space to

the left. Press to move one

space to the right. Press the

key to delete any unwant-

ed characters. Long press

to change the text entry method.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Radio

Con-

trol

Steps

Note:

The first line of the display

shows the characters you keyed

in. The second line shows a

zone that matches what you

have already keyed in. The alias

search is case-insensitive. If

there are two or more with the

same name, the radio displays

the zone that is listed first in the

zone list.

Press to select.

The display shows <Zone> Selected

momentarily and returns to the selected zone

screen.

Selecting a Channel

Transmissions are sent and received on a channel.

Depending on your radio’s configuration, each

channel may have been programmed differently to

support different groups of users or supplied with

different features. After selecting the relevant Zone,

select the relevant channel you require to transmit or

receive on.

Turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to

select the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group

alias or ID.

Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call

Once the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID is

displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to

calls.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is

transmitting and blinks green when the radio is

receiving.

Note:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio

is transmitting and double blinks green when

the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your

radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR

the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed

by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the

radio you are receiving the call from).

See Privacy on page 129 for more

information.

Receiving and Responding to a Group Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio

must be configured as part of that group.

When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home

screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line

shows the caller alias. The second text line displays

the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the

incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

• If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the

moment the transmitting radio releases the

PTT button, indicating the channel is free for

you to respond. Press the PTT button to

respond.

• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,

press the PTT button to stop the current call

from the transmitting radio and free the channel

for you to talk/respond.

The LED lights up solid green.

2Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

•The PTT Sidetone

3Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period

of time, the call ends.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Note:

See Making a Group Call on page 57 for

details on making a Group Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to

another individual radio.

When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks

green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right

corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your

radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through

the speaker of the radio.

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

• If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the

moment the transmitting radio releases the

PTT button, indicating the channel is free for

you to respond. Press the PTT button to

respond.

• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,

press the PTT button to stop the current call

from the transmitting radio and free the channel

for you to talk/respond.

The LED lights up solid green.

2Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

3Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period

of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows Call

Ended.

See Making a Private Call on page 58 for details on

making a Private Call.

Receiving an All Call

An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every

radio on the channel. It is used to make important

announcements requiring the user’s full attention.

When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the

LED blinks green.

The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.

The first text line shows the caller alias. The second

text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and

the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the

previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call

does not wait for a predetermined time before ending.

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

you hear a short alert tone the moment the

transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating

the channel is now available for use.

You cannot respond to an All Call.

Note:

See Making an All Call on page 59 for

details on making an All Call.

Note:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you

switch to a different channel while receiving

the call. During an All Call, you will not be able

to use any programmed button functions until

the call ends.

Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call

A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to

another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an

analog system.

When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinks

green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right

corner. The first text line shows the caller alias or

Selective Call or Alert with Call. The first text

line shows the Private Call icon. The radio displays

Selective Call or Alert with Call. Your radio

unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the

radio's speaker.

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

2Press the PTT button to respond to the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

3Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

4Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period

of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows Call

Ended.

See Making a Private Call on page 58 for details on

making a Private Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Phone Call as Private Call

When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, the

Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the

display shows the caller alias or Phone Call.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,

the first line of the display shows Unavailable and

your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the

previous screen when the call ends.

1Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows

Call Ended.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows

Call Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone

Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the

telephone user to end the call.

Phone Call as Group Call

When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, the

Phone Group Call icon appears in the top right

corner; the display shows the group alias and Phone

Call.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,

the display shows Unavailable and your radio

mutes the call.

1Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows

Call Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone

Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the

telephone user to end the call.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Phone Call as All Call

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the

Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the

display shows All Call and Phone Call.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,

the first line of the display shows Unavailable and

your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the

previous screen when the call ends.

Note:

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call,

you can respond to the call or end the call,

only if an All Call type is assigned to the

channel.

1Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows

All Call and Call Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone

Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call.

Making a Radio Call

After selecting your channel, you can select a

subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

• The Channel Selector Knob.

• A programmed One Touch Access button – The

One Touch Access feature allows you to make a

Group or Private Call to a predefined ID easily.

This feature can be assigned to a short or long

programmable button press. You can ONLY have

one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button.

Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access

buttons programmed.

• The programmed number keys – This method is

for Group, Private and All Calls only and is used

with the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or

All Call with the Programmable Number Key on

page 63).

• A programmable button – This method is for

Phone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call with

the Programmable Phone Button on page 64).

• The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page

82).

• Manual Dial – This method is for Private and

Phone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

(see Making a Phone Call from Contacts on page

85, Making a Private Call from Contacts on page

84, and Making a Call with the Programmable

Manual Dial Button on page 66).

Note:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature

enabled on the channel to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. Only target radios with

the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value

and Key ID as your radio will be able to

unscramble the transmission.

Note:

See Privacy on page 129 for more

information.

Making a Group Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must

be configured as part of that group.

1Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active group alias

or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51.

•Press the programmed One Touch Access

button.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the group call alias.

4Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green. You see the Group Call icon, the group

alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on

your display.

5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the

screen you were on prior to initiating the call.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Note:

You can also make a Group Call via Contacts

(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on

page 83).

Making a Private Call

While you can receive and/or respond to a Private

Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your

radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private

Call.

There are two types of Private Calls. The first type,

where a radio presence check is performed prior to

setting up the call, while the other sets up the call

immediately.

Only one of these call types can be programmed to

your radio by your dealer.

You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you

make a Private Call via the One Touch Access

button, the programmed number keys, or the Channel

Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled.

Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to

contact an individual radio. See Text Message

Features on page 111 or Call Alert Operation on

page 101 for more information.

1Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active subscriber

alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page

51.

• Press the programmed One Touch Access

button.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call

icon appears on the top right corner. The first text

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. You hear a short

tone. The display shows Call Ended.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio

presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If

the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone

and see negative mini notice on the display. You can

also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a

Private Call from Contacts on page 84) or perform a

quick alphanumeric search for the required alias via a

keypad entry (see Making a Group, Private, Phone or

All Call by Alias Search on page 89).

Making an All Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the

channel. Your radio must be programmed to allow

you to use this feature.

Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.

1Select the channel with the active All Call group

alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line

shows All Call.

4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

•The PTT Sidetone

Making a Selective Call

Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or

respond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorized

individual radio, your radio must be programmed for

you to initiate a Selective Call.

1Select the channel with the active subscriber alias

or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

•The PTT Sidetone

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access

Button

1Press the programmed One Touch Access

button to make a Phone Call to the predefined

alias or ID.

If the entry for the One Touch Access button is

empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the

access code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press to proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone

sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone

user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.

The Phone Call icon remains in the top right

corner.

If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds

and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your

radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If

the access code was preconfigured in the

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you

were on prior to initiating the call.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone

Call, enter the extra digits using the keypad and

press to proceed.

The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,

and the radio returns to the previous screen.

Press to end the call.

If de-access code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the display shows De-Access

Code:. Do one of the following.

•

Enter the de-access code and press to

proceed. The radio returns to the previous

screen.

• Press the One Touch Access button. If the

entry for the One Touch Access button is

empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.

The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,

and the display shows Ending Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds

and the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio

returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 or

wait for the telephone user to end the call.

Note:

When the telephone user ends the call, a

tone sounds and the display shows Call

Ended.

If the call ends while you are entering the

extra digits requested by the Phone Call,

your radio returns to the screen you were

on prior to initiating the call.

During channel access, press to

dismiss the call attempt. A tone sounds to

indicate success.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

During the call, if you press the One Touch

Access button with the deaccess code

preconfigured or enter the deaccess code

as the input for extra digits, your radio

attempts to end the call.

The access or deaccess code cannot be

more than 10 characters.

Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button

Note:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated

from the Home screen.

The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily

make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias

or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long

programmable button press.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a

One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple

One Touch Call buttons programmed.

1Press the programmed One Touch Call button to

make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call

alias or ID.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

6If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

you will hear a short alert tone the moment the

target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the

channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT

button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Making a Group, Private or All Call with the

Programmable Number Key

The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to

make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias

or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the

available number keys on a keypad.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a

number key, but you can have more than one number

key associated to an alias or ID.

1Long press the programmed number key, when

you are on the Home screen, to make a Group,

Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.

If the number key is not associated to an entry, a

negative indicator tone sounds.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Group/Private

Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first

text line shows the caller alias. The second text

line displays either the call status for a Private Call

or All Call for All Call.

4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

• the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only)

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the

screen you were on prior to initiating the call.

For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the

call ends.

See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable

Number Key on page 90 for details on assigning

an entry to a number key on the keypad.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone

Button

1Press the programmed Phone button to enter into

the Phone Entry list.

2 or to the required subscriber alias or ID,

and press to select.

If the access code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press the button

to proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone

sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone

user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.

The Phone Call icon remains in the top right

corner. The second text line displays the call

status.

If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and

the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your

radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If

the access code was preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you

were on prior to initiating the call.

3Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

4Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

5To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone

Call, do one of the following.

• Press any keypad key to begin the input of the

extra digits. The first line of the display shows

Extra Digits:. The second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits

and press the button to proceed. The

DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the

previous screen.

• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF

tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Access button is empty, a negative indicator

tone sounds.

Press to end the call.

If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-

Access Code:. The second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code

and press the button to proceed. The radio

returns to the previous screen.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows

Ending Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds

and the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio

returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4

and 6 or wait for the telephone user to end the

call.

When you press PTT button while in the Phone

Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display

shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone

sounds and the display shows Phone Call

Ended.

If the call ends while you are entering the extra

digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio

returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating

the call.

Note:

During channel access, press to

dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.

During the call, when you press One

Touch Access button with the deaccess

code preconfigured or enter the deaccess

code as the input for extra digits, your radio

attempts to end the call.

Note:

The access or deaccess code cannot be

more than 10 characters.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial

Button

Making a Private Call

1Press the programmed Manual Dial button to

enter into the Manual Dial screen.

or to Radio Contact and press to

select.

The display shows Number:.

3Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.

4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

5Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

7Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

8If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

you will hear a short alert tone the moment the

target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the

channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT

button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. You hear a short

tone. The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call

1Press the programmed Manual Dial button to

enter into the Manual Dial screen.

or to Phone Contact and press to

select.

The display shows Number:.

3Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.

If the access code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Enter the access code and press the button

to proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone

sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone

user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.

The Phone Call icon remains in the top right

corner.

If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds

and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your

radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If

the access code was preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you

were on prior to initiating the call.

4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

5Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

6To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone

Call, do one of the following.

• Press any keypad key to begin the input of the

extra digits. Enter the extra digits and press the

button to proceed. The DTMF tone

sounds and the radio returns to the previous

screen.

• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF

tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch

Access button is empty, a negative indicator

tone sounds.

Press to end the call.

If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the display shows De-Access

Code:. Enter the deaccess code and press the

button to proceed. The radio returns to the

previous screen.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows

Ending Phone Call.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds

and the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio

returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 7 or

wait for the telephone user to end the call.

When you press PTT button while in the Phone

Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display

shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone

sounds and the display shows Phone Call

Ended.

If the call ends while you are entering the extra

digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio

returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating

the call.

Note:

During channel access, press to

dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.

Note:

During the call, when you press One

Touch Access button with the deaccess

code preconfigured or enter the deaccess

code as the input for extra digits, your radio

attempts to end the call.

Note:

The access or deaccess code cannot be

more than 10 characters.

Stopping a Radio Call

This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or

Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For

example, when a radio experiences a “stuck

microphone” condition where the PTT button is

inadvertently pressed by the user.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use

this feature.

1Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt

Remote Dekey button, while on the relevant

channel.

The display shows Remote Dekey.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator

tone and the display shows Remote Dekey

Success, indicating that the channel is now free.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative

indicator tone and the display shows Remote

Dekey Failed.

Talkaround

You can continue to communicate when your

repeater is not operating, or when your radio is out of

the repeater’s range but within talking range of other

radios.

This is called “talkaround”.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus

and Linked Capacity Plus.

The Talkaround setting is retained even after

powering down.

You can toggle between talkaround and repeater

modes by pressing the programmed Repeater/

Talkaround button or using the radio menu as

described next.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band

channels that are in the same frequency.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Talkaround and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Talkaround.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Monitoring Features

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Monitoring a Channel

Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is

clear before transmitting.

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and

Linked Capacity Plus.

1Press and hold the programmed Monitor button

and listen for activity.

The Monitor icon appears on the display and the

LED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activity

or total silence, depending on how your radio is

programmed. This indicates that the channel is in

use.

The LED double blinks yellow when channel is

busy.

2 Wait until you hear “white noise”. This indicates

that the channel is free.

3Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

Permanent Monitor

Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuously

monitor a selected channel for activity.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus

and Linked Capacity Plus.

1Press the programmed Permanent Monitor

button to activate permanent monitoring of the

channel.

Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solid

yellow, and the display shows Permanent

Monitor On. The Monitor icon appears on the

display.

2Press the programmed Permanent Monitor

button to exit Permanent Monitor mode.

Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, and

the display shows Permanent Monitor Off.

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Advanced Features in Non-Connect

Plus Mode

Radio Check

If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if

another radio is active in a system without disturbing

the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification

is shown on the target radio.

This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases

or IDs.

Sending a Radio Check

1Access the Radio Check feature.

Radio

Control

Steps

Pro-

gram-

med Ra-

dio

Check

button

1Press the programmed Radio

Check button.

2 or to the required subscrib-

er alias or ID and press to se-

lect.

Radio

Control

Steps

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select.

3Use one of the steps described

next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

• Select the subscriber alias or ID

directly.

• or to the required

subscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

•Use the Manual Dial menu.

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Radio

Control

Steps

• or to Radio Number

and press to select.

• If there was previously dialed

ID, the ID appears along with

a blinking cursor. Else, the

first line of the display shows

Radio Number:; the second

line of the display shows a

blinking cursor. Use the key-

pad to edit/enter the ID, and

press to select.

4 or to Radio Check and

press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

indicating the request is in progress. The LED

lights up solid green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If the button is pressed when the radio is

waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and

the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio

Check mode.

If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicator

tone sounds and the display shows positive mini

notice.

If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negative

indicator tone sounds and the display shows

negative mini notice.

Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.

Remote Monitor

Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the

microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs

only). The green LED will blink once on the target

subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,

remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target

radio.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use

this feature.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Initiating Remote Monitor

1Access the Remote Monitor feature.

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med Re-

mote Mon-

itor Button

1Press the programmed Remote

Monitor button.

2 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

to select.

Menu 1

to access the menu

2 or to Contacts and

press to select

3Use one of the steps described

next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID

• select the subscriber alias or

ID directly

Radio

Control

Steps

• or to the required

subscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

•use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Di‐

al and press to se-

lect.

• or to Radio Num‐

ber and press to se-

lect.

• If there was previously di-

aled ID, the ID appears

along with a blinking cur-

sor. Else, the first line of

the display shows Radio

Number:; the second line

of the display shows a

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Radio

Control

Steps

blinking cursor. Use the

keypad to edit/enter the

ID, and press to se-

lect.

4 or to Remote Mon. and

press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

indicating the request is in progress. The LED

lights up solid green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and

the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio

starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a

programmed duration and display shows Rem.

Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds

an alert tone and the LED turns off.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative

indicator tone the display shows negative mini

notice.

Stopping Remote Monitor

Remote Monitor automatically stops after a

programmed duration or when there is any user

operation on the target radio. Follow the steps below

to manually stop Remote Monitor.

1Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt

Remote Dekey button.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

indicating the request is in progress. The LED

lights up solid green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator

tone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative

indicator tone and the display shows negative mini

notice.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Scan Lists

Scan lists are created and assigned to individual

channels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activity

by cycling through the channel/group sequence

specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group.

Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a

maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list

supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries.

You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing

a scan list.

You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front

Panel Programming.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus

and Linked Capacity Plus.

Viewing an Entry in the Scan List

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

or to Scan List and press to select.

4Use or to view each member on the list.

The Priority icon appears left of the member’s

alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on

a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot

have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a

scan list.

There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.

Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

or to Scan List and press to select.

4Key in the first character of the required alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

5Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the key

to delete any unwanted characters. Long press

to change text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the characters

you keyed in. The next lines of the display show

the shortlisted search results.

The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are

two or more entries with the same name, the radio

displays the entry that is listed first in the scan list.

Editing the Scan List

Adding a New Entry to the Scan List

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

or to Scan List and press to select.

or to Add Member and press to

select.

5Select the required alias or ID by performing one

of the following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Radio

Naviga-

tion But-

tons

or to the required alias or ID.

Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

quired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the left.

Press to move one space to the

right. Press the key to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press

to change the text entry method.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Radio

Control

Steps

The first line of the display shows the

characters you keyed in. The next

lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is

case-insensitive. If there are two or

more aliases with the same name, the

radio displays the alias that is listed

first in the list.

Press to select.

7 or to the required priority level and press

to select.

The display shows positive mini notice, followed

immediately by Add Another?.

8Do one of the following:

•

or to Yes and press to select, and

repeat Steps 5 to 7.

•

or to No and press to save the

current list.

Deleting an Entry from the Scan List

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

or to Scan List and press to select.

4Select the required alias or ID by performing one

of the following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Radio

Naviga-

tion But-

tons

or to the required alias or ID.

Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

quired alias.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Radio

Control

Steps

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the left.

Press to move one space to the

right. Press the key to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press

to change the text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the

characters you keyed in. The next

lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is

case-insensitive. If there are two or

more aliases with the same name, the

radio displays the alias that is listed

first in the list.

Press to select.

or to Delete and press to select.

7Do one of the following:

•

or to Yes and press to delete

entry. The display shows positive mini notice.

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

8Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to delete other entries.

After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long

press to return to the Home screen.

Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the

Scan List

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

or to Scan List and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

4Select the required alias or ID by performing one

of the following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Radio

Naviga-

tion But-

tons

or to the required alias or ID.

Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

quired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the left.

Press to move one space to the

right. Press the key to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press

to change the text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the

characters you keyed in. The next

lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is

Radio

Control

Steps

case-insensitive. If there are two or

more aliases with the same name, the

radio displays the alias that is listed

first in the list.

Press to select.

or to Edit Priority and press to

select.

7 or to the required priority level and press

to select.

The display shows positive mini notice before

returning to the previous screen.

Note:

The Priority icon appears left of the name

of the member.

There is no Priority icon if priority is set to

None.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Scan

When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the

programmed scan list for the current channel looking

for voice activity.

The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears on

the status bar.

During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital

channel, and your radio locks onto an analog

channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to

analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also

true for the reverse.

There are two ways of initiating scan:

•Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans

all the channels/groups in your scan list. On

entering scan, your radio may (depending on the

settings) automatically start on the last scanned

“active” channel/group or on the channel where

scan was initiated.

•Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically

starts scanning when you select a channel/group

that has Auto Scan enabled.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus

and Linked Capacity Plus.

Starting and Stopping Scan

While scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g.

text message, location, or PC data) if received on its

Selected Channel.

1Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a

channel programmed with a scan list.

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

or to Scan State and press to

select.

or to required scan state and press

to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

•The display shows Scan On when Scan is

enabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scan

icon appears.

•The display shows Scan Off if Scan is

disabled. The LED turns off and the scan icon

disappears.

Responding to a Transmission During a Scan

During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group

where activity is detected. The radio stays on that

channel for a programmed time period known as

“hang time”.

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

2Press the PTT button during hang time.

The LED lights up solid green.

3Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

•The PTT Sidetone

4Release the PTT button to listen.

If you do not respond within the hang time, the

radio returns to scanning other channels/groups.

Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or

noise (termed a “nuisance” channel), you can

temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the

scan list.

This capability does not apply to the channel

designated as the Selected Channel.

Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possible

through the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete

button. This feature is not accessible through the

menu.

1When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted or

nuisance channel, press the programmed

Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a

tone.

2Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button.

The nuisance channel is deleted.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Restoring a Nuisance Channel

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of

the following:

• Turn the radio off and then power it on again.

• Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan

button or menu.

•Change the channel via the Channel Selector

Knob.

Vote Scan

Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in

areas where there are multiple base stations

transmitting identical information on different analog

channels.

Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base

stations and performs a voting process to select the

strongest received signal. Once that is established,

your radio unmutes to transmissions from that base

station.

The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan icon

appears on the status bar.

To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan,

follow the same procedures as Responding to a

Transmission During a Scan on page 81.

Contact Settings

Contacts provides “address-book” capabilities on your

radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that

you use to initiate a call.

Each entry, depending on context, associates with

one of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All

Call, PC Call or Dispatch Call.

PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are

only available with the applications. Refer to the data

applications documentation for more information.

Note:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,

you can make privacy-enabled Group Call,

Private Call, and All Call on that channel. Only

target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the

same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will

be able to unscramble the transmission.

See Privacy on page 129 for more

information.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign

each entry to a programmable number key or more

on a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key,

your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry.

Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog

contacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximum

of 500 members for each Contacts list.

Each entry within Contacts displays the following

information:

• Call Type

• Call Alias

• Call ID

Note:

You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the

Digital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs

can only be performed by your dealer.

For the Analog Contacts list, you can only

view the subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber

IDs, and initiate a Call Alert. Adding and

deleting capabilities can only be performed by

your dealer.

Making a Group Call from Contacts

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required group alias or ID.

4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

5Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

6Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

•The PTT Sidetone

7Release the PTT button to listen.

When any user in the group responds, the LED

blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the

group ID, and the user’s ID on your display.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

Making a Private Call from Contacts

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described next to select the

required subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.

•use the Manual Dial menu

•

or to Manual Dial and press

to select.

•

or to Radio Number and press

to select.

• If there was previously dialed subscriber

alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along

with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of

the display shows Radio Number:; the

second line of the display shows a blinking

cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID.

Press to select.

4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

5Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display shows

the destination alias.

6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

7Release the PTT button to listen.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green and the display shows the transmitting

user's ID.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call from Contacts

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described next to select the

required subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.

•use the Manual Dial menu

•

or to Manual Dial and press

to select.

•

or to Phone Number and press

to select.

•The first line of the display shows Phone

Number: , the second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to

enter a telephone number, and press

to select the entered number.

If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator

tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call

Invalid # .

When you press PTT button while in the Phone

Contacts screen, a negative indicator tone sounds

and the display shows Press OK to Place

Phone Call.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

or to Call Phone and press to

select.

5If the access code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the first line of the display shows

Access Code: . The second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code

and press to proceed.

During channel access, press to dismiss the

call attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds.

Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen.

The access code cannot be more than 10

characters.

The first line of the display shows Calling. The

second line of the display shows the subscriber

alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon.

If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear

the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line

of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID,

and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display

shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon.

If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display

shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to

the Access Code input screen. If the access code

was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio

returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating

the call.

6Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

7Do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

Note:

The RSSI icon disappears during

transmission.

To enter extra digits, if requested by the

Phone Call, press any keypad key to

begin the input of extra digits. The first

line of the display shows Extra

Digits: . The second line of the

display shows a blinking cursor. Enter

the extra digits and press to

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and

the radio returns to the previous screen.

If the call ends while you are entering

the extra digits requested by the Phone

Call, your radio returns to the screen

you were on prior to initiating the call.

• Press One Touch Access button.

Note:

The DTMF tone sounds.

If the entry for the One Touch Access

button is empty, a negative indicator

tone sounds.

During the call, when you press One Touch

Access button with the deaccess code

preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the

input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end

the call.

During channel access and access/deaccess code

or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to

On/Off/Volume Control Knob and Channel

Selector Knob only. A tone sounds for every

invalid input.

Press to end the call.

9If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the

Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-

Access Code:. The second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code

and press to proceed.

The deaccess code cannot be more than 10

characters.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows

Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows

Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Call

Phone screen.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone

Call screen. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 or wait for the

telephone user to end the call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone

sounds and the display shows Phone Call

Ended.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Making a Call Alias Search

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to

retrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

Note:

Press button or to exit alias search.

If you release the PTT button while the radio is

setting up the call, it exits without any

indication and returns to the previous screen.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a

radio presence check prior to setting up the

Private Call. If the target radio is not available,

you hear a short tone and see negative mini

notice on the display. The radio returns to the

menu prior to initiating the radio presence

check.

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3Key in the first character of the required alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

4Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the key

to delete any unwanted characters. Long press

to change text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the characters

you keyed in. The next lines of the display show

the short listed search results. The alias search is

case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries

with the same name, the radio displays the entry

that is listed first in the Contacts list.

5Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

6Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display shows

the destination alias.

7Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

8Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to

retrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

Note:

Press button or to exit alias search.

If you release the PTT button while the radio is

setting up the call, it exits without any

indication and returns to the previous screen.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a

radio presence check prior to setting up the

Private Call. If the target radio is not available,

you hear a short tone and see Party Not

Available on the display; the radio returns to

the menu prior to initiating the radio presence

check.

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3Key in the first character of the required alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

4Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the key

to delete any unwanted characters.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

The first line of the display shows the characters

you keyed in. The second line of the display

shows an alias that matches what you have keyed

in. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are

two or more entries with the same name, the radio

displays the entry that is listed first in the Contacts

list.

5 or to scroll to desired entry, if necessary.

6Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

7Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The first line

displays the target radio’s ID. The second line

displays the call type and the Call icon.

8Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

9Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

10 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

you will hear a short alert tone the moment the

target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the

channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT

button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a programmed

period of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows Call

Ended.

Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key

Note:

See Making a Group, Private or All Call with

the Programmable Number Key on page 63

for details on making a Group, Private or All

Call with the programmed number key(s).

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

or to Program Key and press to

select.

5 or to the desired number key and press

to select.

If the number key is currently assigned to another

entry, the display shows The Key is Already

Assigned and then, the first line of the display

shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following.

•

or to Yes and press to overwrite

the number key assignment.

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous step.

Each entry can be associated to different number

keys. You see a before each number key that is

assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that

number key is not assigned.

If a number key is assigned to an entry in a

particular mode, this feature is not supported when

you long press the number key in another mode.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the

display shows positive mini notice.

The screen automatically returns to the previous

menu.

Removing the Association between Entry and

Programmable Number Key

1Access the required alias or ID via:

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med num-

ber key

Long press the programmed number

key to the required alias or ID; press

to select.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Radio

Control

Steps

3 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

to select.

or to Program Key and press to

select.

or to Empty and press to select.

The first line of the display shows Clear from

all keys? .

or to Yes and press to select.

Note:

When an entry is deleted, the association

between the entry and its programmed

number key(s) is removed.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the

display shows positive mini notice.

The screen automatically returns to the previous

menu.

Adding a New Contact

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

or to New Contact and press to

select.

4 or to the required contact type, either

Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press

to select.

5Use the keypad to enter the contact number and

press to confirm.

6Use the keypad to enter the contact name and

press to confirm.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

7If adding a Radio Contact, or to the

required ringer type and press to select.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the

display shows positive mini notice.

Setting a Default Contact

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

or to Set as Default and press to

select.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the

display shows positive mini notice.

A appears beside the selected default alias or

ID.

Call Indicator Settings

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a

received Call Alert.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

or to the required tone and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private

Calls

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received

Private Call.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

or to Private Call and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective

Call

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a

received Selective Call.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

or to Selective Call and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to the required tone and press to

select.

appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text

Message

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received

Text Message.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

or to Text Message and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

or to the required tone and press to

select.

appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry

Status with Text

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received

Telemetry Status with Text.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

or to Telemetry and press to select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7Do one of the following:

•

or to the preferred tone and press

to select. The display shows Tone <Number>

Selected and a appears left of the selected

tone.

•

or to Turn Off and press to

select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer

Off and a appears left of Turn Off.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

Assigning Ring Styles

You can program your radio to sound one of ten

predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert

or a Text Message from a particular contact.

The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate

through the list.

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

or to Edit Ringtone and press to

select.

or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Selecting a Ring Alert Type

Note:

The programmed Ring Alert Type button is

assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

You can program the radio calls to one

predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is

disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon.

If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert

type is displayed.

The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentary

ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a

repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate,

the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any

incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or

Message). It sounds like a good key tone or missed

call.

For radios with batteries that support the vibrate

feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the

available Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring,

Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.

For radios with batteries that do not support the

vibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The

available Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.

You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one

of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to

access the Ring Alert Type menu.

a) Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select.

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press

to select.

c) Press or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

d) Press or to Tones/Alerts and press

to select.

e) Press or to Ring Alert Type and

press to select.

f) Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select.

Configuring Vibrate Style

Note:

The programmed Vibrate Style button is

assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip

is attached to the radio with a battery that supports

the vibrate feature.

You can configure the vibrate style by performing one

of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to

access the Vibrate Style menu.

a) Press or to Short, Medium, or Long

and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press

to select.

c) Press or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

d) Press or to Tones/Alerts and press

to select.

e) Press or to Vibrate Style and press

to select.

f) Press or to Short, Medium, or Long

and press to select.

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

You can program your radio to continually alert you

when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done

by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume

over time. This feature is known as Escalert.

Call Log Features

Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,

answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log

feature to view and manage recent calls.

You can perform the following tasks in each of your

call lists:

• Store ID to Contacts

• Delete

•View Details

Viewing Recent Calls

The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to preferred list and press to

select.

The display shows the most recent entry at the top

of the list.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

English

4 or to view the list.

Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with

the current selected alias or ID.

Storing an Alias from a Call List

You can also store an ID without an alias.

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to the required list and press to

select.

or to Store and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the

alias for that ID and press . The display

shows positive mini notice.

Deleting a Call from a Call List

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to the required list and press to

select.

When you select a call list and it contains no

entries, the display shows List Empty, and

sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page

152).

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

or to Delete Entry? and press to

select.

6Do one of the following:

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

100

English

•

Press to select Yes to delete the entry.

The display shows Entry Deleted.

•

or to No, and press the button to

return to the previous screen.

Viewing Details from a Call List

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to the required list and press to

select.

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

or to View Details and press to

select.

Display shows details.

Call Alert Operation

Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio

user to call you back when they are able to do so.

This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs

only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts

or manual dial.

Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert

When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the

notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of

the calling radio on the display.

When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED

blinks yellow, do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button while the display still

shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to

respond with a Private Call.

•

Press to exit the Notification List. The alert

is moved to the Missed Call Log.

See Notification List on page 146 for details about

the Notification List.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

101

English

See Call Log Features on page 99 for details

about the Missed Call List.

Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

3Use one of the steps described next to select the

required subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.

•use the Manual Dial menu

•

or to Manual Dial and press

to select.

•

or to Radio Number and press

to select.

•The first line of the display shows Radio

Number: , the second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Enter the

subscriber ID you want to page and press

or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Call Alert and the

subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert

has been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio is

sending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

display shows positive mini notice.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,

the display shows negative mini notice.

Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button

Press the programmed One Touch Access

button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias

or ID.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

102

English

The display shows Call Alert and the

subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert

has been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio is

sending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

display shows positive mini notice.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,

the display shows negative mini notice.

Emergency Operation

An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical

situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at

any time on any screen display even when there is

activity on the current channel.

Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for

the programmed Emergency button, except for long

press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75

seconds.

Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75

seconds.

The Emergency button is assigned with the

Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for

the assigned operation of the Emergency button.

Note:

If the short press for the Emergency button is

assigned to turn on the Emergency mode,

then the long press for the Emergency button

is assigned to exit the Emergency mode.

If the long press for the Emergency button is

assigned to turn on the Emergency mode,

then the short press for the Emergency button

is assigned to exit the Emergency mode.

Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

•Emergency Alarm

• Emergency Alarm with Call

•Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

Note:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can

be assigned to the programmed Emergency

button.

In addition, each alarm has the following types:

•Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal and

shows audio and/or visual indicators.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

103

English

•Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal without

any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls

without any sound through the radio’s speaker,

until you press the PTT button to initiate the call.

•Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarm

signal without any audio or visual indicators, but

allow incoming calls to sound through the radio’s

speaker.

Receiving an Emergency Alarm

On receiving an emergency alarm the emergency

icon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red and

the radio displays the emergency caller alias. If more

than one alarm has occurred all emergency caller

aliases are displayed in an Alarm List.

1When receiving an emergency alarm, do one of

the following:

• If a single emergency call alias is displayed,

press to view more details. Press

again to view your action details.

• If the multiple emergency caller aliases are

displayed in the Alarm List, or to the

required alias and press to view more

details. Press again to view your action

items.

Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.

To revisit the Alarm List, press to access the

menu and select Alarm List.

Responding to an Emergency Alarm

1In the Alarm List, or to the required alias.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

you will hear a short alert tone the moment the

transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is now available for use.

3Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency

voice to the same group that the Emergency

Alarm was targeted to.

Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the

emergency initiating radio. All other radios

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

104

English

(including the emergency receiving radio) transmit

non-emergency voice.

The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remains

in the Emergency mode.

4Do one of the following:

• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if

enabled) and speak clearly into the

microphone.

• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the emergency initiating radio responds, the

LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,

the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your

display.

6Your radio displays the Alarm List.

Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the

Emergency Alarm

Exit the Emergency mode by performing one of

the following actions:

• Delete the alarm items, see Deleting an Alarm

Item from the Alarm List for more information.

• Power down the radio.

Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,

a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication

on a group of radios.

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any

audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode.

Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

•Tx Alarm and the destination alias.

•Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency

icon appears on the Home screen display.

When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is

received, the Emergency tone sounds and the

LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.

If your radio does not receive an Emergency

Alarm acknowledgement, and after all retries have

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

105

English

been exhausted, a tone sounds and the display

shows Alarm Failed.

Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and

returns to the Home screen.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm

to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a

radio within the group, the group of radios can

communicate over a programmed Emergency

channel.

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any

audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or

allow any received calls to sound through the speaker

of the radio, until you press the PTT button to initiate

the call.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not

display any audio or visual indicators during

Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound

through the speaker of the radio. The indicators only

appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or

respond to, the call.

1Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

•Tx Alarm and the destination alias.

•Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency

icon appears on the Home screen display.

When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is

received, the Emergency tone sounds and the

LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.

Your radio enters the emergency call mode when

the display shows Emergency and the destination

group alias.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green and the Group icon

appears on the display.

4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone

•The PTT Sidetone

5Release the PTT button to listen.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

106

English

If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

6Press the PTT button to respond.

7Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button

to exit the Emergency mode.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm

to a group of radios. The microphone of your radio is

automatically activated, allowing you to communicate

with the group of radios without pressing the PTT

button.

This activated microphone state is also known as “hot

mic”.

If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,

repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made

for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle

Mode, received calls sound through the speaker of

the radio.

If you press the PTT button during the programmed

receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating

that you should release the PTT button. The radio

ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergency

mode.

Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic,

and continue to press it after the hot mic

duration expires, the radio continues to

transmit until you release the PTT button.

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any

audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or

allow any received calls to sound through the speaker

of the radio, until the programmed hot mic

transmission period is over, and you press the PTT

button.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not

display any audio or visual indicators during

Emergency mode when you are making the call with

hot mic, but allow sound through the speaker of the

radio when the target radio responds after the

programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The

indicators only appear when you press the PTT

button.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

107

English

Note:

If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio

does not retry to send the request, and enters

the hot mic state directly.

1Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

•Tx Alarm and the destination alias.

•Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency

icon is displayed.

2Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak

clearly into the microphone.

When hot mic has been enabled, the radio

automatically transmits without a PTT button press

until the hot mic duration expires. While

transmitting, the LED lights up solid green and the

Emergency icon appears on the display.

3The radio automatically stops transmitting when

the cycling duration between hot mic and receiving

calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is

enabled.

4Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio

automatically stops transmitting. To transmit

again, press the PTT button.

Reinitiating an Emergency Mode

Note:

This feature is only applicable to the radio

sending the Emergency Alarm.

There are two instances where this can happen:

• You change the channel while the radio is in

Emergency mode. This exits the Emergency

mode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this new

channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.

• You press the programmed Emergency On

button during an Emergency initiation/transmission

state. This causes the radio to exit this state, and

to reinitiate Emergency.

Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency

Alarm

Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the

following occurs:

•Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received

(for Emergency Alarm only).

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

108

English

• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted.

• The Emergency Off button is pressed.

Note:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the

Emergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate

the Emergency mode automatically when it is

turned on again.

If you change channels when your radio is in

Emergency mode to a channel that has no

emergency system configured, No Emergency

is shown on your display.

Man Down

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if

there is a change in the motion of the radio, such as

the tilt of the radio, motion and/or the lack of motion

for a predefined time.

Following a change in the motion of the radio for a

programmed duration, the radio pre-warns the user

via an audio indicator indicating that a change in

motion is detected.

If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before

the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio

initiates an Emergency Alarm or an Emergency Call.

You can program the reminder timer via CPS.

Turning the Man Down Feature On or Off

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only. The programmed Man Down

button and Man Down settings are assigned

via CPS. Check with your dealer or system

administrator to determine how your radio has

been programmed.

If you disable the Man Down feature, the

programmed alert tone sounds repeatedly until

the Man Down feature is enabled. A device

failure tone sounds when the Man Down

feature fails while powering up. The device

failure tone continues until the radio resumes

normal operation.

If you enable Man Down to maximum

sensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, the

radio automatically restricts Vibrate Style to

medium. This function prevents high Vibrate

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

109

English

Style from initiating the Man Down emergency

feature.

You can enable or disable this feature by performing

one of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Man Down button to

toggle the feature on or off.

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press

to select.

c) Press or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

Press or to Man Down and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the

selected option.

Press to enable or disable Man Down.

This display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears beside Enabled.

Analog Message Encode

Your radio is able to send pre-programmed

messages from the Message list to a radio alias or to

the dispatcher.

Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher

to access the menu.

or to Message and press to select.

or to Quick Text and press to

select.

or to the required message. Press to

send.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the

display shows positive mini notice.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

110

English

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and

the display shows negative mini notice.

Text Message Features

Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text

message, from another radio or an e-mail application.

The maximum length of characters for sending a text

message, including the subject line (seen when

receiving message from an e-mail application),

depends on CPS configuration which can be

configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio

can receive a text message with maximum length of

280 characters.

If user forwards a text message with characters more

than the maximum length, the text message will be

truncated to the maximum length.

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity

timer expires. Any text message in the writing/editing

screen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Writing and Sending a Text Message

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Compose and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

111

English

characters. Long press to change text entry

method.

Press once message is composed.

5Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do

one of the following.

•

or to Send, and press to send the

message.

•

or to Save, and press to save the

message to the Drafts folder.

•

to edit the message.

•

to choose between deleting the message

or saving it to the Drafts folder.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returns

you to the Resend option screen (see Managing

Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115.

Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch

Access Button

Press the programmed One Touch Access

button to send a predefined Quick Text message

to a predefined alias or ID.

The display shows the transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the

display shows the positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows the negative mini notice.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returns

you to the Resend option screen (see Managing

Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115).

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

112

English

Accessing the Drafts Folder

You can save a text message to send it at a later

time.

If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the

radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen

while you are in the process of writing or editing a text

message, your current text message is automatically

saved to the Drafts folder.

The most recent saved text message is always added

to the top of the Drafts list.

The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last

saved messages. When the folder is full, the next

saved text message automatically replaces the oldest

text message in the folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Viewing a Saved Text Message

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message

Press again while viewing the message.

or to Edit and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

113

English

A blinking cursor appears.

3Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method.

Press once message is composed.

5Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows Radio

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to

the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send

Failed icon.

Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

114

English

or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

or to Delete and press to delete the

text message.

Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

You can select one of the following options while at

the Resend option screen:

• Resend

• Forward

•Edit

Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or

Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not

a match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-

to-Send message.

Resending a Text Message

Press to resend the same message to the

same subscriber/group alias or ID.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows the positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, the display shows

the negative mini notice.

Forwarding a Text Message

Select Forward to send the message to another

subscriber/group alias or ID.

or to Forward and press to select.

2Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows Radio

Number:. The second line of the display shows

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

115

English

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Editing a Text Message

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.

Note:

If a subject line is present (for messages

received from an e-mail application), you

cannot edit it.

or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

2Use the keypad to edit your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method.

Press once message is composed.

4Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do

one of the following.

•

or to Send, and press to send the

message.

•

or to Save, and press to save the

message to the Drafts folder.

•

to edit the message.

•

to choose between deleting the message

or saving it to the Drafts folder.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

116

English

5If you are sending the message, select the

recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows Radio

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Text Message:

<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved

in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is

always added to the top of the Sent Items list.

The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a

maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the

folder is full, the next sent text message automatically

replaces the oldest text message in the folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Viewing a Sent Text Message

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

117

English

or to Sent Items and press to

select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

A subject line may be shown if the message is

from an e-mail application.

The icon at the top right corner of the screen

indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item

Icons on page 43).

Sending a Sent Text Message

You can select one of the following options while

viewing a sent text message:

• Resend

• Forward

•Edit

• Delete

Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or

Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not

a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete

a Sent message.

Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to one of the following options and

press to select.

Option Steps

For‐

ward

Select Forward to send the selected

text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text

Message on page 115).

Edit Select Edit to edit the selected text

message before sending it (see Editing

a Text Message on page 116).

De‐

lete

Select Delete to delete the text mes-

sage.

Re‐

send Select Resend to resend the selected

text message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

118

English

Option Steps

The display shows transitional mini no-

tice, confirming that the same message

is being sent to the same target radio.

If the message is sent successfully, a

tone sounds and the display shows pos-

itive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low

tone sounds and the display shows neg-

ative mini notice.

If the message fails to send, the radio

returns you to the Resend option screen.

Press to resend the message to

the same subscriber/group alias or ID.

Note:

Changing the volume, and

pressing any button, except for

, , or , returns you to

the message.

The radio exits the Resend op-

tion screen if you press the PTT

Option Steps

button to initiate a Private or

Group Call, or to respond to a

Group Call. The radio also exits

the screen when it receives a

text or telemetry message, an

emergency call or alarm, or a

call alert.

The display returns to the Re‐

send option screen if you press

the PTT button to respond to a

Private Call (except when the

radio is displaying the Missed

Call screen), and at the end of

an All Call.

If you exit the message sending screen while the

message is being sent, the radio updates the

status of the message in the Sent Items folder

without providing any indication in the display or

via sound.

If the radio changes mode or powers down before

the status of the message in Sent Items is

updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

119

English

Progress messages and automatically marks it

with a Send Failed icon.

The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this

period, the radio cannot send any new message

and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.

Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Sent Items and press to

select.

When you select Sent Items and it contains no

text messages, the display shows List Empty,

and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned

on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page

152).

or to Delete All and press to

select.

4Choose one of the following.

•

or to Yes and press to select. The

display shows positive mini notice.

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Receiving a Text Message

When your radio receives a message, the display

shows the alias or ID of the sender and the Message

icon.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

120

English

You can select one of the following options when

receiving a text message:

• Read

• Read Later

•Delete

Note:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen

and sets up a Private or Group Call to the

sender of the messageif the PTT button is

pressed when the radio is displaying the alert

screen.

Reading a Text Message

or to Read? and press to select.

Selected message in the Inbox opens.

A subject line may be shown if the message is

from an e-mail application.

2Do one of the following:

•

Press to return to the Inbox.

•

Press a second time to reply, forward, or

delete the text message.

Managing Received Text Messages

Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The

Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30

messages.

Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to

the most recently received.

Your radio supports the following options for text

messages:

• Reply

• Forward

• Delete

• Delete All

Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or

Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not

a match, you can only forward, delete, or

delete all Received messages.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

121

English

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

to access the menu.

or to Messages and press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or to view the messages.

A subject line may be shown if the message is

from an e-mail application.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to select the current message, and

press again to reply, forward, or delete

that message.

•

Long press to return to the Home screen.

Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from

the Inbox

to access the menu.

or to Messages and press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or to the required message and press

to select.

You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text

message.

The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text

Message>.

Long press to return to the Home screen.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

122

English

Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

A subject line may be shown if the message is

from an e-mail application.

Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5Do one of the following:

•

or to Reply and press to select.

•

or to Quick Reply and press to

select.

A blinking cursor appears.

6Use your keypad to write/edit your message.

Press once message is composed.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

123

English

If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns

you to the Resend option screen (see Managing

Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115).

Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

A subject line may be shown if the message is

from an e-mail application.

Press once more to access the sub-menu.

or to Delete and press to select.

or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows positive mini notice and the

screen returns to the Inbox.

Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

124

English

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

When you select Inbox and it contains no text

messages, the display shows List Empty, and

sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page

152).

or to Delete All and press to

select.

or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows positive mini notice.

Job Tickets

Your radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which are

messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks that

need to be performed.

You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them

into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are

“All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with

your dealer or system administrator for an additional

10 folders.

Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets,

all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job

Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state

are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number

of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically

replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio.

Note:

Job Tickets are retained even after radio is

powered down and powered up again.

Your radio will automatically detect and

discard the duplicated Job Tickets with the

same subject line.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

125

English

Accessing the Job Ticket Folder

Access the Job Ticket folder.

Radio

Control

Steps

Pro-

gram-

med

Job

Ticket

button

1Press the programmed Job Ticket

button.

2 or to the required folder and

press to select.

Note:

You can also press

and the corresponding num-

ber key (1–9) to access the

required folder.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets and

press to select.

Radio

Control

Steps

3 or to the required folder and

press to select.

Note:

You can also press

and the corresponding num-

ber key (1–9) to access the

required folder.

4 or to the required Job Ticket

and press to select.

Logging In and Out of the Remote Server

This feature allows you to log in and log out of the

remote server by using your user ID via the menu.

to access the menu.

or to Log In and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

126

English

If you are already logged in, menu displays Log

Out.

The display shows a transitional mini notice,

confirming that you have been logged in

successfully.

If you have failed to log in, the display shows a

negative mini notice.

Creating and Sending a Job Ticket

Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which is

based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks

that need to be performed.

Note:

CPS is required to configure the Job Ticket

template. Check with your dealer or system

administrator to determine how your radio has

been programmed.

to access the menu.

or to Job Tickets and press to

select.

or to Create Ticket and press to

select.

4Depending on how your radio is configured, do

one of the following:

If Then

If your radio is

configured with

one Job Ticket

template,

1Use the keypad to type the

required room number and

press to select.

2 or to Room Status

and press to select.

3 or to the required

option and press to se-

lect.

If your radio is

configured with

more than one

Job Ticket tem-

plate,

or to the required op-

tion and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

127

English

or to Send and press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,

confirming your message is sent.

If the message is not sent, the display shows

negative mini notice.

Responding to the Job Ticket

to access the menu.

or to Job Tickets and press to

select.

or to the required folder and press to

select.

You can also press the corresponding number key

(1–9) to access the required folder.

4 or to the required Job Ticket and press

to select.

Press once more to access the sub-menu.

You can also press the corresponding number key

(1–9) to Quick Reply.

6 or to the required Job Ticket and press

to select.

You can also press the corresponding number key

(1–9) to respond to the job ticket.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming

your message being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display

shows positive mini notice.

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the

display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Job Ticket

Delete a Job Ticket.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

128

English

Radio

Control

Steps

Pro-

gram-

med

Job

Ticket

button

1Press the programmed Job Ticket

button.

or to All and press to

select.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets and

press to select.

or to All and press to

select.

4 or to the required Job Tick-

et and press to select.

Radio

Control

Steps

Note:

At Step 4, while viewing the

Job Ticket, press to

delete.

Press again while viewing the

Job Ticket.

6 or to Delete and press

to select.

Note:

You can also press to

delete.

Privacy

If enabled, this feature helps to prevent

eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel

by the use of a software-based scrambling solution.

The signaling and user identification portions of a

transmission are not scrambled.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

129

English

Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel

to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this

is not a necessary requirement for receiving a

transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,

the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled)

transmissions.

Your radio supports two types of privacy:

• Basic Privacy.

• Enhanced Privacy.

Only one of the privacy types above can be assigned

to the radio.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data

transmission, your radio must be programmed to

have the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or the

same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy)

as the transmitting radio.

If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a

different Privacy Key, or a different Key Value and

Key ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission

(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy).

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band

channels that are in the same frequency.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is

transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is

receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.

You can access this feature by performing one of the

following actions:

• Pressing the programmed Privacy button to

toggle privacy on or off.

• Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps

described next.

Note:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy

feature. Check with your dealer or system

administrator for more information.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Privacy and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

130

English

You can also use or to change selected

option.

Press to enable/disable Privacy.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)

The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature

allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an

interface to telephone systems.

1Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMF

call.

2Enter the desired number, * or #.

You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all

radio tones and alerts (see Turning the Radio

Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 157).

Multi-Site Controls

These features are applicable when your current

radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Linked

Capacity Plus configuration.

See IP Site Connect on page 47 and Linked Capacity

Plus on page 48 for more details about these

configurations.

Starting an Automatic Site Search

Note:

The radio only scans for a new site if the

current signal is weak or when the radio is

unable to detect any signal from the current

site. If the RSSI value is strong, the radio

remains on the current site.

Start Automatic Site search by

Radio

Controls

Steps

Site

Lock

On/Off

button

Press the programmed Site Lock

On/Off button to toggle the start/stop

automatic site search.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

131

English

Radio

Controls

Steps

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.

5 or to Site Lock and

press to select.

If the current channel is a multi-site channel with

an attached roam list and is out of range, the radio

also performs an automatic site search (site is

unlocked) during:

• a PTT button press.

•data transmission.

A tone sounds and the display shows Site

Unlocked.

The radio then returns to the Home screen. The

display shows the Site Roaming icon and channel

alias.

The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is

actively searching for a new site, and turns off

once the radio locks on to a site.

Stopping an Automatic Site Search

When your radio is actively searching for a new

site, you can stop the search by

Radio

Controls

Steps

Site

Lock

On/Off

button

Press the programmed Site Lock

On/Off button to stop automatic site

search.

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

132

English

Radio

Controls

Steps

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.

5 or to Site Lock and

press to select.

A tone sounds and the display shows Site

Locked.

The radio then returns to the Home screen. The

LED turns off and the display shows the channel

alias.

Starting a Manual Site Search

Start a Manual Site Search by

Radio

Controls

Steps

Manual

Site

Roam

button

Press the programmed Manual Site

Roam button to start the manual site

search.

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.

5 or to Active Search and

press to select.

A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site,

and the LED blinks green.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

133

English

If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED

turns off. The display shows Site <Alias>

Found.

If there is no available site within range, a tone

sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows

Out of Range.

If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable

to connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns

off. The display shows Channel Busy.

The radio returns to the Home screen.

Security

You can enable or disable any radio in the system.

For example, you might want to disable a stolen

radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable

that radio, when it is recovered.

Note:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is

limited to radios with these functions enabled.

Check with your dealer or system

administrator for more information.

Radio Disable

1Access this feature by

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

Radio

Disable

button

1Press the programmed Radio Disa-

ble button.

2 or to the required alias or ID

and press to select.

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described next

to select the required subscriber

alias or ID:

• Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

134

English

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to

select.

•Use the Manual Dial menu.

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.

• or to Radio Number

and press to select.

• The first line of the display

shows Radio Number:. The

second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Use

the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

4 or to Radio Disable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber

Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator

tone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If not successful, the radio sounds a negative

indicator tone and the display shows negative mini

notice.

Do not press during the Radio Disable

operation as you will not get an acknowledgement

message.

Radio Enable

1Access this feature by

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

135

English

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

Radio

Enable

button

1Press the programmed Radio Ena-

ble button.

2 or to the required alias or ID

and press to select.

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described next

to select the required subscriber

alias or ID

• Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly.

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to

select.

•Use the Manual Dial menu.

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.

• or to Radio Number

and press to select.

• The first line of the display

shows Radio Number:. The

second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Use

the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

136

English

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

4 or to Radio Enable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber

Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator

tone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If not successful, the radio sounds a negative

indicator tone and the display shows negative mini

notice.

Do not press during the Radio Enable

operation as you will not get an acknowledgement

message.

Lone Worker

This feature raises an emergency if there is no user

activity, such as any radio button press or activation

of the channel selector, for a predefined time.

Before raising the emergency, when the inactivity

timer expires, the radio warns the user via an audio

indicator.

If there is still no acknowledgement by the user

before the predefined reminder timer expires, the

radio initiates an Emergency Alarm.

Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can be

assigned to this feature:

• Emergency Alarm

• Emergency Alarm with Call

•Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

The radio remains in the emergency state allowing

voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See

Emergency Operation on page 103 on ways to exit

Emergency.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

137

English

Note:

This feature is limited to radios with this

function enabled. Check with your dealer or

system administrator for more information.

Password Lock Features

If enabled, this feature only allows you access your

radio if the correct password is entered upon

powering up.

Accessing the Radio from Password

1Power up your radio.

You hear a continuous tone.

2Do one of the following: Enter your current four-

digit password. Press or to edit each digit’s

numeric value. Each digit changes to . Press

to move to next digit. Press to confirm your

selection.

• Enter your current four-digit password with the

radio’s keypad. The second line of the display

shows . Press to proceed.

• Enter your current four-digit password. Press

or to edit each digit’s numeric value.

Each digit changes to . Press to move to

next digit. Press to confirm your selection.

You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit

entered. Press to remove the last on the

display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you

press when the second line of the display is

empty, or if you press more than four digits.

If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to

power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page

27.

If the password is incorrect, the display shows

Wrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

After the third incorrect password, the display

shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio

Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks

yellow.

Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes,

and responds to inputs from On/Off/Volume

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

138

English

Control Knob and programmed Backlight button

only.

Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call,

including emergency calls, in locked state.

Unlocking the Radio from Locked State

1If your radio was powered down after being in the

locked state, power up the radio.

A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.

The display shows Radio Locked.

2Wait for 15 minutes.

Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked

state when you power up.

3Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio from

Password on page 138.

Turning the Password Lock On or Off

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5Enter the four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password

on page 138.

Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display shows

Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the

previous menu.

7If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, press to enable/disable password

lock.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

139

English

Changing the Password

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5Enter the four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password

on page 138.

Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display shows

Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the

previous menu.

7If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, or to Change Pwd and press

to select.

8Enter a new four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password

on page 138.

9Reenter the previously entered four-digit

password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio

from Password on page 138.

Press to proceed.

If the reentered password matches the new

password entered earlier, the display shows

Password Changed.

If the reentered password does NOT match the

new password entered earlier, the display shows

Passwords Do Not Match.

The screen automatically returns to the previous

menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

140

English

Bluetooth Operation

Note:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related

features are disabled and the Bluetooth device

database is erased.

This feature allows you to use your radio with a

Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless

Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both

Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32

feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path

between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled

device.

It is not recommended that you leave your radio

behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to

work with a high degree of reliability when they are

separated.

At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone

quality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. To

correct this problem, simply position your radio and

Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within

the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish

clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function

has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range.

Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous

Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled

devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a

scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple

connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the

same type are not supported.

Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s

user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled device’s full capabilities.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to My Status and press to select.

The display shows On and Off. The current status

is indicated by a .

4Do one of the following:

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

141

English

•

or to On and press to select. The

display shows On and a appears left of the

selected status.

•

or to Off and press to select. The

display shows Off and a appears left of the

selected status.

Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device

Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or

press during the finding and connecting

operation as this cancels the operation.

1Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place

it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled device’s user manual.

On your radio, press to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

5Do one of the following:

• or to the required device and press

to select.

• or to Find Devices to locate available

devices. or to the required device and

press to select.

or to Connect and press to select.

Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your

Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional

steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective

Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

If successful, the radio display shows <Device>

Connected. A tone sounds and appears besides

the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon

appears on the status bar.

If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting

Failed.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

142

English

Note:

If pin code is required, use the same entry

method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from

Password on page 138.

Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode)

Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the

finding and connecting operation as this may cancel

the operation.

1Turn Bluetooth On.

See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 141.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Find Me and press to select.

Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This

is called Discoverable Mode.

5Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it

with your radio.

Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s

user manual.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device

On your radio, press to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to Disconnect and press to

select.

Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.

Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require

additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective

Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

143

English

The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A

positive indicator tone sounds and disappears

beside the connected device. The Bluetooth

Connected icon disappears on the status bar.

Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker

and Bluetooth Device

You can toggle audio routing between internal radio

speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch

button.

•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio

to Radio.

•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio

to Bluetooth.

Viewing Device Details

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to View Details and press to

select.

Editing Device Name

You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled

devices.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

144

English

or to Edit Name and press to select.

6Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press to

change text entry method.

A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type

the required zone.

7The display shows Device Name Saved.

Deleting Device Name

You can remove a disconnected device from the list

of Bluetooth-enabled devices.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to Delete and press to select.

The display shows Device Deleted.

Bluetooth Mic Gain

Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled

device’s microphone gain value.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to BT Mic Gain and press to

select.

4 or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current

values.

To edit values, press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

145

English

5 or to increase or to decrease values and

press to select.

Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode

Note:

The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode

can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO

CPS. If enabled, the Bluetooth item will not

be displayed in the Menu and you will not be

able to use any Bluetooth programmable

button features.

Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your

radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. It

enables dedicated devices to use your radio position

in the process of Bluetooth-based location.

Notification List

Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your

“unread” events on the channel, such as unread text

messages, telemetry messages and missed calls.

Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notification

list.

The Notification icon appears on the status bar when

the Notification List has one or more events.

For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events,

the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missed

calls/call alerts. This maximum number depends on

individual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/

call alerts) list capability.

Note:

After the events are read, they are removed

from the Notification List.

Accessing the Notification List

to access the menu.

or to Notification and press to

select.

or to the required event and press to

select.

Long press to return to the Home Screen.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

146

English

Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS)

ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to inform

you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-

equipped radios.

ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals

periodically to confirm that they are within range of

each other. Your dealer can program your radio to

transmit or receive the ARTS signal.

Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

•First-Time Alert – A tone sounds and the display

shows In Range after the channel alias.

•ARTS-in-Range Alert – A tone sounds, if

programmed, and the display shows In Range

after the channel alias.

•ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert – A tone sounds, the

LED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternates

between Out of Range and the home screen.

Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)

Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely,

via OTAP, without needing to be physically

connected. Additionally, some settings can also be

configured via OTAP.

While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green.

Note:

When the radio is receiving high volume data,

the High Volume Data icon appears and

channel is busy. A PTT button press at this

time may cause a negative tone to sound.

Once the programming is complete, depending on

your radio’s configuration:

•A tone sounds, the display shows Updating

Restarting, and your radio restarts (powers off

and on again).

•Select between Restart Now or Postpone.

Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return to

the previous display, with an OTAP Timer icon

visible, for a period of time before the automatic

restart occurs.

Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, the

display shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP

update is successful or Sw Update Failed if the

OTAP update is unsuccessful.

See Software Update on page 184 for your updated

software version.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

147

English

Wi-Fi Operation

Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-

Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio

firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language

packs and voice announcement.

Turning Wi-Fi On or Off

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is

assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing one

of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.

Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or

Turning Off Wi-Fi.

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to

select.

c) Press or to WiFi Status and press

to select.

Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows

beside Enabled.

Press to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears

from beside Enabled.

Connecting to a Network Access Point

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

148

English

When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans and

connects to a network access point.

You can also connect to a network access point via

the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

4Press or to a network access point and

press to select.

Press or to Connect and press to

select.

Enter the password and press .

When the connection is successful, the radio

displays a notice and the network access point is

saved into the profile list.

Refreshing the Network List

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

•Perform the following actions to refresh the

network list.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to

select.

Press or to Networks and press

to select.

When you enter the Networks menu, the radio

automatically refreshes the network list.

•If you are already in the Networks menu, perform

the following action to refresh the network list.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

149

English

Press or to Refresh and press to

select.

The radio refreshes and displays the latest

network list.

Adding a Network

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

If a preferred network is not in the available network

list, perform the following actions to add a network.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

Press or to Add Network and press

to select.

5Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press

Press or to Open and press to select.

Enter the password and press .

The radio displays to indicate that the

network is successfully saved.

Viewing Details of Network Access Points

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

Perform the following actions to view details of

network access points.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

150

English

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

4Press or to a network access point and

press to select.

Press or to View Details and press

to select.

For a connected network access point, the Service

Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media

Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet

Protocol (IP) address are displayed.

For a non-connected network access point, the

Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode

are displayed.

Removing Network Access Points

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only. Enterprise network access points

that are added via CPS can only be removed

via CPS.

Perform the following actions to remove network

access points from the profile list.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

4Press or to the selected network access

point and press to select.

Press or to Remove and press to

select.

Press or to Yes and press to select.

The radio displays to indicate that the

selected network access point is successfully

removed.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

151

English

Utilities

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad

You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertent

key entry.

To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.

Option Steps

Locking

the Key-

pad

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

4 or to Keypad Lock and

press to select.

You can also use or to change the

selected option.

Option Steps

Unlocking

the Key-

pad

Press followed by .

After the keypad is locked, the display shows

Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.

After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows

Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home

screen.

Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

152

English

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Keypad Tones and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable keypad tones.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Squelch Level

You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out

unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels

that have a higher than normal background noise.

Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)

calls and/or background noise; however, calls from

remote locations may also be filtered out.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band

channels that are in the same frequency.

Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle

squelch level between normal and tight. Follow the

procedure described next to access this feature via

the radio’s menus.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Squelch and press to select.

or to the required setting and press

to select.

appears besides selected setting. Screen

returns to the previous menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

153

English

Setting the Power Level

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band

channels that are in the same frequency.

You can customize the power setting of the radio to

high or low for each channel.

High enables communication with radios located at a

considerable distance from you. Low enables

communication with radios in closer proximity.

Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle

transmit power level between high and low. Follow

the procedure described next to access this feature

via the radio menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press to

select.

3Press or to Radio Settings and press

to select.

Press or to Power and press to

select.

5Press or to the required setting and press

to select.

appears beside selected setting. At any time,

long press to return to the Home screen.

Screen returns to the previous menu.

Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off

A channel can support up to 6 option board features.

Refer to your dealer or system administrator for more

information.

Press the programmed Option Board Feature

button to toggle the feature on or off.

Identifying Cable Type

You can select the type of cable your radio uses.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

154

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Cable Type and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

5The current cable type is indicated by a .

Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)

Feature On or Off

This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice

activated call on a programmed channel. The radio

automatically transmits, for a programmed period,

whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable

accessory detects voice.

Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band

channels that are in the same frequency.

Pressing the PTT button during radio operation will

disable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of the

following:

•Turn the radio off and power it on again.

• Change the channel via the Channel Selector

Knob.

•Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the

feature on or off.

• Follow the steps described next to access this

feature via the radio menu.

If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page

158), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for

the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly

into the microphone.

Note:

Turning this feature on or off is limited to

radios with this function enabled. Check with

your dealer or system administrator for more

information.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

155

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to VOX and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to disable/enable VOX.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Display Backlight Timer

You can set the the radio’s display backlight timer as

needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation

Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly.

Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the

backlight settings, or follow the procedure described

next to access this feature via the radio menu.

The display backlight and keypad backlighting are

automatically turned off if the LED indicator is

disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on

page 162).

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

or to Backlight Timer and press to

select.

You can use or to change the selected

option.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

156

English

Turning the Backlight Auto On or Off

You can enable and disable the radio’s backlight to

turn on automatically if needed. If enabled, the

backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call,

Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Backlight Auto.

Press to enable/disable the Backlight Auto.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if

needed.

Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to

toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure

described next to access this feature via the radio

menu.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to All Tones and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

157

English

Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level

You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if

needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice

volume.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Vol. Offset and press to

select.

6 or to the required volume value.

The radio sounds a feedback tone with each

corresponding volume value.

7Do one of the following:

•

Press to keep the required displayed

volume value.

•

Press to exit without changing the current

volume offset settings.

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if

needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

158

English

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Talk Permit and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Talk Permit

Tone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone

if needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Power Up and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Power Up Alert

Tone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

159

English

Setting the Text Message Alert Tone

You can customize your radio’s text message alert

tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the

Contacts list.

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to the required subscriber alias or ID

and press to select.

or to Message Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Momentary and Repetitive.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to the required setting and press to

enable.

appears besides selected setting.

Changing the Display Mode

You can change radio’s display mode between Day

or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of

the display.

Change the Display Mode:

Radio

Control

Steps

Pro-

gram-

med

Display

Mode

Button

Press the programmed Display Mode

button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press

to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

160

English

Radio

Control

Steps

4 or to Display and press

to select.

The display shows Day Mode and

Night Mode.

Note:

You can also use or to

change the selected option.

5 or to the required setting

and press to enable. ap-

pears besides selected setting.

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as

needed.

Note:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when

Auto Brightness is enabled.

Adjust the Display Brightness by performing one of

the following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med Dis-

play

Bright-

ness

Button

1Press the programmed Bright-

ness button.

2Decrease display brightness by

pressing or increase the display

brightness by pressing . Select

from setting of 1 to 8. Press

to confirm your entry.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press

to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

161

English

Radio

Control

Steps

4 or to Brightness and

press to select.

The display shows a progress bar.

5Decrease display brightness by

pressing or increase the display

brightness by pressing . Select

from setting of 1 to 8. Press

to confirm your entry.

Language

You can set your radio display to be in your required

language.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Languages and press to select.

You can also use or to change selected

option.

5 or to the required language and press

to enable. appears beside selected

language.

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off

You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if

needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

162

English

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to LED Indicator and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if

needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

or to Intro Screen and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Introduction

Screen.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off

Note:

The Voice Announcement feature can only be

enabled via the MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled,

the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically

disabled, and vice versa.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

163

English

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the

current Zone or Channel the user has assigned, or

programmable button press. This audio indicator can

be customized per customer requirements. This is

typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition

to read the content shown on the display.

Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off.

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med Voice

An-

nounce-

ment But-

ton

Press the programmed Voice An-

nouncement button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

Radio

Control

Steps

4 or to Voice Announce‐

ment and press to select.

Note:

You can also use or

to change the selected

option.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Voice

Announcement. The display

shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Voice

Announcement. The disap-

pears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature

Note:

The Text-to-Speech feature can only be

enabled via the MOTOTRBO Customer

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

164

English

Programming Software. If enabled, the Voice

Announcement feature is automatically

disabled, and vice versa. Check with your

dealer or system administrator for more

information.

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the

following features:

• Current Channel

• Current Zone

•Programmed button feature on or off

• Content of received text messages

• Content of received Job Tickets

This audio indicator can be customized per customer

requirements. This is typically useful when the user is

in a difficult condition to read the content shown on

the display.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Voice Announcement and press

to select.

5 or to any of the following features and

press to select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

•All

•Messages

•Job Tickets

•Channel

•Zone

•Program Button

appears beside the selected setting.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

165

English

Call Forwarding

You can enable your radio to automatically forward

voice calls to another radio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Call Forward and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

4Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Call Forwarding. The

display shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Call Forwarding. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Menu Timer

Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu

before it automatically switches to the Home screen.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

or to Menu Timer and press to

select.

or to the required setting and press

to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

166

English

Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain

automatically while transmitting on an analog system.

It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a

preset value in order to provide a consistent level of

audio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to Mic AGC-A and press to select.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Mic AGC-A. The display

shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Mic AGC-A. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain

automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It

suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a

preset value in order to provide a consistent level of

audio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to Mic AGC-D and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

167

English

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The display

shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker

and Wired Accessory

You can toggle audio routing between the internal

radio speaker and the speaker of wired accessory

provided that:

• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.

• The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth-

enabled accessory.

Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory

resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.

Press the programmed Audio Toggle button to

toggle audio routing between the internal radio

speaker and the speaker of wired accessory.

Intelligent Audio

Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume

to overcome background noise in the environment,

inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise

sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and

does not affect Transmit audio.

Note:

This feature is not applicable during a

Bluetooth session.

Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off.

Radio

Control

Steps

Pro-

gram-

med In-

telligent

Audio

Button

Press the programmed Intelligent Au-

dio button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

168

English

Radio

Control

Steps

2 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

4 or to Intelligent Audio

and press to select.

Note:

You can also use or to

change the selected option.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Intelligent

Audio. The display shows be-

side Enabled.

Radio

Control

Steps

•

Press to disable Intelligent

Audio. The disappears from

beside Enabled.

See Authorized Accessories List on page 307 for

recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories

with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar

performance.

Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On

or Off

This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback

in received calls.

Toggle the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor

Feature On or Off by performing one of the

following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med Press the programmed Acoustic

Feedback Suppressor button.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

169

English

Radio

Control

Steps

Acoustic

Feedback

Suppres-

sor But-

ton

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

4 or to AF Suppressor and

press to select.

Note:

You can also use or

to change the selected op-

tion.

Radio

Control

Steps

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Acoustic

Feedback Suppressor. The

display shows beside Ena-

bled.

•

Press to disable Acoustic

Feedback Suppressor. The

disappears from beside Ena-

bled.

Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control

Feature On or Off

This feature allows you to enable the radio to

automatically monitor the microphone input and

adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio

clipping.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

170

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to Mic Distortion and press to

select.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Microphone Dynamic

Distortion Control. The display shows beside

Enabled.

•

Press to disable Microphone Dynamic

Distortion Control. The disappears from

beside Enabled.

Setting the Audio Ambience

You can customize the audio ambience of the radio

according to your environment.

Default enables the default factory settings.

Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increases

speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings.

Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disables

AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each

other.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Audio Ambience and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

171

English

or to the required setting and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

appears beside the selected setting.

Screen returns to the previous menu.

Setting the Audio Profiles

You can customize the audio profiles of the radio

according to your preference.

Default disables the previously selected audio

profile and the radio’s audio profile returns to normal.

Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profiles

intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing

loss that is typical for adults in their 40’s, 50’s, and

60’s or over.

Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are for

a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper

sound.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Audio Profiles and press to

select.

or to the required setting and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

appears beside the selected setting.

Screen returns to the previous menu.

Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off

Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a

satellite navigation system that determines the radio’s

precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning

System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

172

English

(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System

(BDS).

Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle

the feature on or off.

Note:

Selected radio models may offer GPS,

GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is

configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press to

select.

3Press or to Radio Settings and press

to select.

Press or to GPS and press to select.

Press to enable/disable GPS/GNSS.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page

184 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information.

Text Entry Configuration

You can configure the following settings for entering

text on your radio:

• Word Predict

• Word Correct

• Sentence Cap

• My Words

Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

• Numbers

• Symbols

• Predictive or Multi-Tap

• Language (If programmed)

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

173

English

Note:

Press at any time to return to the

previous screen or long press to return to

the Home Screen. The radio exits the current

screen once the inactivity timer expires.

Word Predict

Your radio can learn common word sequences that

you often enter. It then predicts the next word you

may want to use after you enter the first word of a

common word sequence into the text editor.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to Word Predict and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

6Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Word Predict. The display

shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Word Predict. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Sentence Cap

Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter

in the first word for every new sentence.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

174

English

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to Sentence Cap and press to

select.

6Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Sentence Cap. The

display shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Sentence Cap. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Viewing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into your radio’s

in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to

contain these words.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to List of Words and press to

select.

Display shows the list of custom words.

Editing Custom Word

You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

175

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to List of Words and press to

select.

Display shows the list of custom words.

or to the required word and press to

select.

or to Edit and press to select.

9Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word is

completed.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming

your custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the

display shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Adding Custom Word

You can add your own custom words into your radio’s

in-built dictionary.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

176

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to Add New Word and press to

select.

Display shows the list of custom words.

7Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word is

completed.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming

your custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the

display shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Custom Word

You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

177

English

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to the required word and press to

select.

or to Delete and press to select.

8Choose one of the following.

•

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.

The display shows Entry Deleted.

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Deleting All Custom Words

You can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-

built.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to Delete All and press to

select.

7Choose one of the following.

•

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.

The display shows Entry Deleted.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

178

English

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Flexible Receive List

Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currently

supported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus)

feature that allows you to add, delete or edit members

on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a

maximum of 16 members in the list.

Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off

You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive List

if needed.

Enable the Flexible Receive List by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trol

Steps

Programmed

Flexible Re-

ceive List

Button

Press the programmed Flexible

Receive List button.

Radio Con-

trol

Steps

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Flexible Rx

List and press to select.

Press to enable or disable

the Flexible Receive List fea-

ture.

display

Current display

Turn On Flexible Rx List On

Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off

Adding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

179

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Flexible Rx List and press

to select.

or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

or to Add Member and press to

select.

7Select the required alias or ID by performing one

of the following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Radio

Naviga-

or to the required alias or ID.

Radio

Control

Steps

tion But-

tons

Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

quired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the left.

Press to move one space to the

right. Press the key to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press

to change the text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the

characters you keyed in. The next

lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is

case-insensitive. If there are two or

more aliases with the same name, the

radio displays the alias that is listed

first in the list.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

180

English

Press to select.

The display shows Add Another?.

or to No and press to select

The display shows .

Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Flexible Rx List and press

to select.

or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

6Select the required alias or ID by performing one

of the following actions:

Radio

Control

Steps

Radio

Naviga-

tion But-

tons

or to the required alias or ID.

Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

quired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the left.

Press to move one space to the

right. Press the key to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press

to change the text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the

characters you keyed in. The next

lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

181

English

Radio

Control

Steps

case-insensitive. If there are two or

more aliases with the same name, the

radio displays the alias that is listed

first in the list.

Press to select.

or to Delete and press to select.

or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows .

Accessing General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

• Battery

• Radio Alias and ID

•Firmware and Codeplug Versions

• GPS Information

• Software Update

• Site Information

Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the Home

screen. The radio exits the current screen once the

inactivity timer expires.

Accessing the Battery Information

Displays information on your radio battery.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Battery Info and press to

select.

The display shows the battery information.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

182

English

For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads

Recondition Battery if the battery requires

reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the

reconditioning process, the display then shows the

battery information.

Checking the Radio Alias and ID

This feature displays the ID of your radio.

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to

check your radio alias and ID. You hear a positive

indicator tone.

Follow the procedure described next to access this

feature via the radio screen.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to My ID and press to select.

The first line of the display shows the radio alias.

The second line of the display shows the radio ID.

You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and

ID button to return to the previous screen.

Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug

Version

Displays the firmware version on your radio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Versions and press to select.

The display shows the current firmware and

codeplug versions.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

183

English

Checking the GPS/GNSS Information

Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio,

such as values of:

• Latitude

• Longitude

•Altitude

• Direction

• Velocity

• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)

• Satellites

• Version

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to GPS Info and press to select.

or to the required item and press to

select.

The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS

information.

See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 172 for

details on GPS/GNSS.

Software Update

Displays the date and time of the latest software

update carried out via Over-the-Air Programming.

Note:

Software Update menu is only available after

at least one successful OTAP session.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

184

English

or to SW Update and press to select.

The display shows the date and time of the latest

software update.

See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 147

for details on OTAP session.

Site Information

Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site name

your radio is on.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Site Info and press to select.

The display shows the current Linked Capacity

Plus site name.

See Linked Capacity Plus on page 48 for details on

Linked Capacity Plus.

Front Panel Configuration (FPC)

Your radio is able to customize certain feature

parameters to enhance the use of your radio.

Entering FPC Mode

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Program Radio and press to

select.

Long press at any time to return to the Home

screen.

Editing FPC Mode Parameters

Use the following buttons as required while navigating

through the feature parameters:

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

185

English

•, – Scroll through options, increase/

decrease values, or navigate vertically.

•

– Select the option or enter a sub-menu.

•

– Short-press to return to previous menu or

to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return

to Home screen.

Checking the RSSI Values

Your radio shows the Received Signal Strength

Indicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. This

feature allows you to view the RSSI values.

On the home screen, press three times and

immediately press , all within 5 seconds.

The display shows current RSSI values. Long

press the to return to the Home Screen.

See Display Icons on page 39 for details on RSSI

icon.

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode

186

English

Connect Plus Operations

187

English

Additional Radio Controls in Connect

Plus Mode

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button

The PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) serves

two basic purposes:

• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows

the radio to transmit to other radios in the call.

Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the

PTT button to listen.

The microphone is activated when the PTT button

is pressed.

• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is

used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call

on page 203).

If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit

Tone On or Off on page 158) is enabled, wait until the

short alert tone ends before talking.

Programmable Buttons

Your dealer can program the programmable buttons

as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the

duration of a button press:

Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.

Long press Pressing and holding for the

programmed duration.

Press and hold Keeping the button pressed.

Note:

The programmed duration of a button press is

applicable for all assignable radio/utility

functions or settings. See Emergency

Operation on page 232 for more information

on the programmed duration of the

Emergency button.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

188

English

Assignable Radio Functions

Beacon On/Off Toggles the Beacon feature on

or off. Requires purchase of

Connect Plus Man Down

feature.

Beacon Reset Resets (cancels) the Beacon

tone, but it does not turn the

Beacon feature off. Requires

purchase of Connect Plus Man

Down feature.

Bluetooth® Audio

Switch

Toggles audio routing between

internal radio speaker and

external Bluetooth-enabled

accessory.

Busy Queue

Cancellation

Exits the busy mode when a

non-Emergency call in the

Busy Queue was initiated.

Emergency calls, once

accepted into the Busy Queue,

cannot be cancelled.

Call Log Selects the call log list.

Contacts Provides direct access to the

Contacts list.

Emergency On/Off Depending on the

programming, initiates or

cancels an emergency.

Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or

off.

Man Down Alarms

On/Off

Toggles all configured Man

Down Alarms on or off.

Requires purchase of Connect

Plus Man Down feature.

Man Down Alarms

Reset

If pressed while a Man Down

feature Alert Tone is playing,

the tone is cancelled and

feature timers are reset, but it

does not turn the Man Down

Alarms off. Requires purchase

of Man Down feature.

Manual Dial Depending on the

programming, initiates a

Private or Phone Call by

keying in any subscriber ID or

phone number.

One Touch

Access

Directly initiates a predefined

Private Call, a Call Alert or a

Quick Text message.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

189

English

Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.

Radio Check Determines if a radio is active

in a system.

Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be

remotely enabled.

Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be

remotely disabled.

Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a

target radio without it giving

any indicators.

Roam Request Requests to search for a

different site.

Scan Toggles scan on or off.

Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio

searches the current site only.

When toggled off, the radio

searches other sites in addition

to the current site.

Text Message Selects the text message

menu.

Voice

Announcement for

Channel

Plays zone and channel

announcement voice

messages for the current

channel. This function is

unavailable when Voice

Announcement is disabled.

Voice

Announcement

On/Off

Toggles voice announcement

on or off.

Zone Allows selection from a list of

zones.

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback

Suppressor feature on or off.

All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on

or off.

Backlight Toggles display backlight on or

off.

Backlight

Brightness

Adjusts the brightness level.

Display Mode Toggles the day/night display

mode on or off.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

190

English

Global

Positioning

System (GPS)

Toggles the satellite navigation

system on or off.

Keypad Lock Toggles keypad between

locked and unlocked.

Power Level Toggles transmit power level

between high and low.

Unassigned Indicates that the button

function has not yet been

assigned.

Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus

Mode

Display Icons

The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display

(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,

and menu entries.

The following are icons that appear on the display of

the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar,

arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and

are channel specific.

Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI)

The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four

bars indicate the strongest signal. This

icon is only displayed while receiving.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth feature is enabled but

there is no remote Bluetooth device con-

nected.

Bluetooth Connected

The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The

icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth

device is connected.

Notification List has items to review.

or Power Level

Radio is set at Low power or Radio is

set at High power.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

191

English

Tones Disable

Tones are turned off.

Option Board

The Option Board is enabled.

Option Board Non-Function

The Option Board is disabled.

GPS/GNSS Available

The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The

icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-

able.

GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of

Range

The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but

is not receiving data from the satellite.

Scan

Scan feature is enabled.

Emergency

Radio is in Emergency mode.

Secure

The Privacy feature is enabled.

Unsecure

The Privacy feature is disabled.

Site Roaming

The site roaming feature is enabled.

Battery

The number of bars (0 – 4) shown indi-

cates the charge remaining in the bat-

tery. Blinks when the battery is low.

Wi-Fi Excellent[6]

Wi-Fi signal is excellent.

Wi-Fi Good[6]

Wi-Fi signal is good.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

192

English

Wi-Fi Average[6]

Wi-Fi signal is average.

Wi-Fi Poor[6]

Wi-Fi signal is poor.

Wi-Fi Unavailable[6]

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.

Call Icons

The following icons appear on the radio’s display

during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts

list to indicate ID type.

Private Call

Indicates a Private Call in progress. In

the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number).

Group Call/Site All Call

Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call

in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a group alias (name) or ID

(number).

Phone Call as Private Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call

in progress.

Dispatch Call

The Dispatch Call contact type is used

to send a text message to a dispatch-

er PC through a third-party Text Mes-

sage Server.

Advanced Menu Icons

The following icons appear beside menu items that

offer a choice between two options or as an indication

that there is a sub-menu offering two options.

6Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

193

English

Checkbox (Empty)

Indicates the option is not selected.

Checkbox (Checked)

Indicates the option is selected.

Solid Black Box

Indicates the option selected for the menu

item with a sub-menu.

Sent Item Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner of

the radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.

Sent Successfully

The text message is sent successfully.

In-Progress

• The text message to a group alias or ID

is pending transmission.

• The text message to a subscriber alias

or ID is pending transmission, followed

by waiting for acknowledgement.

Bluetooth Device Icons

The following icons also appear next to items in the

list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate

the device type.

Bluetooth Data Device

Bluetooth-enabled data device, such

as a scanner.

Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth-enabled audio device,

such as a headset.

Bluetooth PTT Device

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

194

English

Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such

as a PTT-Only Device (POD).

LED Indicator

The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status of

your radio.

Blinking red Battery mismatch occurs or radio is

transmitting at low battery condition,

receiving an emergency transmis-

sion or has failed the self-test upon

powering up, or has moved out of

range if radio is configured with Au-

to-Range Transponder System.

Rapidly

blinking red

Radio is receiving over-the-air file

transfer (Option Board firmware file,

Network Frequency file or Option

Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to

a new Option Board firmware file.

Blinking

green and

yellow

Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-

ceived a text message or Scan is en-

abled and is receiving activity.

Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable

Mode.

Double

blinking yel-

low

Radio is actively searching for a new

site.

Blinking yel-

low

Radio is receiving a Call Alert or

Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will

remain muted to any activity).

Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting.

Blinking

green

Radio is powering up, receiving a

non-privacy- enabled call or data.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

195

English

Double

blinking

green

Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled

call.

Indicator Tones

High pitched tone Low pitched tone

Positive Indicator Tone

Negative Indicator Tone

Alert Tones

Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the

status, or response to data received on the radio.

Continuous Tone A monotone sound.

Sounds continuously un-

til termination.

Periodic Tone Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration

set by the radio. Tone

starts, stops, and repeats

itself.

Repetitive Tone A single tone that re-

peats itself until it is ter-

minated by the user.

Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a

short period of time de-

fined by the radio.

Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-

Connect Plus Modes

To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must

change to another zone, if programmed by your

dealer or system administrator. Check with your

dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has

been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and

what features are available while operating in non-

Connect Plus zones.

Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode

196

English

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect

Plus Mode

Selecting a Site

A site provides coverage for a specific area. A

Connect Plus site has a site controller and a

maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the

Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new

site when the signal level from the current site drops

to an unacceptable level.

Roam Request

A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a

different site, even if the signal from the current site is

acceptable.

If there are no sites available,

•The radio display shows Searching and

continues to search through the list of sites.

• The radio will return to the previous site, if the

previous site is still available.

Note:

This is programmed by your dealer.

Press the programmed Roam Request button.

You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched

to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site

Number>.

Site Lock On/Off

When toggled on, the radio searches the current site

only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites

in addition to the current site.

Press the programmed Site Lock button.

• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating

the radio has locked to the current site. The

display shows Site Locked.

•You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating

the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site

Unlocked.

Site Restriction

Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the

ability to decide which network sites your radio is and

is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be

reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and

disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a

disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

197

English

Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio

then searches for a different network site.

Selecting a Zone

The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16

Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone

contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on

the Channel Selector Knob.

Each assignable knob position can be used to start

one of the following voice call types:

• Group Call

• Multigroup Call

• Site All Call

• Private Call

1Access the Zone feature by performing one of the

following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Zone button

Press the programmed Zone

button.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Radio menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Zone and press

to select.

The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

2Select the required zone.

Radio Control Steps

or or and scroll to the re-

quired zone.

Press to select.

The display shows <Zone> Selected

momentarily and returns to the selected zone

screen.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

198

English

Using Multiple Networks

If your radio has been programmed to use multiple

Connect Plus networks, you can select a different

network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is

assigned to the desired network. These network-to-

zone assignments are configured by your dealer

through radio programming.

Selecting a Call Type

Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type.

This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All

Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is

programmed. If you change the Channel Selector

Knob to a different position (that has a call type

assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register

with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with

the Registration Group ID that has been programmed

for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.

If you select a position that has no call type assigned

to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the

display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not

operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel,

use the Channel Selector Knob to select a

programmed channel instead.

Once the required zone is displayed (if you have

multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed

Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.

Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call

Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is

displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to

calls.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is

transmitting and blinks green when the radio is

receiving.

Note:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio

is transmitting and double blinks green when

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

199

English

the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your

radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR

the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed

by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the

radio you are receiving the call from).

Note:

See Privacy on page 257 for more

information.

Receiving and Responding to a Group Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio

must be configured as part of that group.

When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home

screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line

shows the caller alias. The second text line displays

the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the

incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

The LED lights up solid green.

2Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if

enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

3Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

Note:

See Making a Group Call on page 203 for

details on making a Group Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to

another individual radio.

When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks

green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right

corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your

radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through

the speaker of the radio.

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

2Press the PTT button to respond to the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

3Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

200

English

4Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period

of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows Call

Ended.

See Making a Private Call on page 204 for details on

making a Private Call.

Receiving a Site All Call

A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to

every radio on the site. It is used to make important

announcements requiring the user’s full attention.

When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and

the LED blinks green.

The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.

The first text line shows the caller alias. The second

text line displays Site All Call. Your radio

unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the

radio speaker.

Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the

previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All

Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time

before ending.

You cannot respond to an Site All Call.

Note:

See Making a Site All Call on page 205 for

details on making a Site All Call.

Note:

The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if

you switch to a different channel while

receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you

will not be able to use any programmed button

functions until the call ends.

Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call

When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the

Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top

right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.

1Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk.

Release the PTT button to listen.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display returns to the Phone Call screen.

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

201

English

Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone

Private Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line of

the display shows Phone Call.

1Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the

button.

Press followed by within 2 seconds to

insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the

display.

The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the

top right corner. The first text line of the display

shows the entered digits.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display returns to the Phone Call screen.

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone

Private Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line of

the display shows Phone Call.

1Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter

the digits.

The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the

top right corner. The first text line of the display

shows the Live Dial digits.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display returns to the Phone Call screen.

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call

When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call,

the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.

The first text line shows Call1.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

202

English

Press the PTT button to talk and release it to

listen.

Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call

When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group

Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right

corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call.

The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call

sounds through the radio's speaker.

Making a Radio Call

After selecting your channel, you can select a

subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

• The Channel Selector Knob.

• A programmed One Touch Access button – The

One Touch Access feature allows you to make a

Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature

can be assigned to a short or long programmable

button press. You can ONLY have one ID

assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your

radio can have multiple One Touch Access

buttons programmed.

• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page

222).

• Manual Dial – This method is for Private Calls only

and is dialed using the keypad (see Making a

Private Call from Contacts on page 223, and

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial

Button on page 206).

Note:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature

enabled on the channel to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. Only target radios with

the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio

will be able to unscramble the transmission.

Note:

See Privacy on page 257 for more

information.

Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob

Making a Group Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must

be configured as part of that group.

1Select the channel with the active group alias or

ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 199.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

203

English

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows the group call alias.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green, the radio unmutes and the response

sounds through the radio’s speaker. You see the

Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and

transmitting radio alias or ID on your display.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the

screen you were on prior to initiating the call.

Making a Private Call

While you can receive and/or respond to a Private

Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your

radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private

Call.

You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you

make a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log,

One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector

Knob, if this feature is not enabled.

Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to

contact an individual radio. See Text Message

Features on page 244 or Call Alert Operation on

page 101 for more information.

1Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active subscriber

alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page

199.

• Press the programmed One Touch Access

button.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call

icon appears on the top right corner. The first text

line shows the target subscriber alias. The second

text line displays the call status.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

204

English

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. You hear a short

tone. The display shows Call Ended.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio

presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If

the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone

and see negative mini notice on the display.

Making a Site All Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the

site that are currently not engaged in another call.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use

this feature.

Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site

All Call.

1Select the channel with the active Site All Call

group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page

199.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

line shows Site All Call.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making a Multi-group Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on

multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to

allow you to use this feature.

Note:

Users on the groups cannot respond to a

Multi-group Call.

1Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the

Multi-group alias or ID.

2Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display shows

the Multi-group alias or ID.

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

205

English

Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button

Note:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated

from the Home screen.

The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily

make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias

or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long

programmable button press.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a

One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple

One Touch Call buttons programmed.

1Press the programmed One Touch Call button to

make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call

alias or ID.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial

Button

Making a Private Call

1Press the programmed Manual Dial button to

enter into the Manual Dial screen.

The display shows Number:.

2Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or

Private ID.

3Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

4Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call

icon appears in the top right corner. The first text

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

206

English

line shows the subscriber alias. The second text

line displays the call status.

5Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

6Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends. You hear a short

tone. The display shows Call Ended.

Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the

Programmable Manual Dial Button

1Press the programmed Manual Dial button to

enter into the Manual Dial screen.

The display shows Number:.

2Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and

press to place a call to the entered number.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to insert

a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

If successful, the first line of the display shows

Phone Call. The second line of the display shows

the dialed telephone number.

If an invalid telephone number is selected, the

display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call

Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid

Permissions.

If is pressed with no telephone number

entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone

then a negative indicator tone. The display

remains the same.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

207

English

Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone

to access the menu.

or to Phone and press to select.

Press to select Manual Dial.

The first line of the display shows Number, the

second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.

4Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and

press to place a call to the entered number.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to insert

a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

If successful, the first line of the display shows

Phone Call. The second line of the display shows

the dialed telephone number.

If an invalid telephone number is selected, the

display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call

Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid

Permissions.

If is pressed with no telephone number

entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone

then a negative indicator tone. The display

remains the same.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts

Note:

If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in

MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board

CPS, the Phone Number item will not be

displayed in the Menu.

to access the menu.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

208

English

or to Contacts and press to select.

or to Manual Dial and press to

select.

or to Phone Number and press to

select.

The first line of the display shows Number, the

second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.

5Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and

press to place a call to the entered number.

If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a

negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and

returns to the previous screen.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to insert

a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

If successful, the first line of the display shows

Phone Call. The second line of the display shows

the dialed telephone number.

If is pressed with no telephone number

entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone

then a negative indicator tone. The display

remains the same.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private

Phone Call

When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of

the display shows Phone Call. The second line of

the display shows the dialed telephone number.

When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private

Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line

of the display shows the telephone number.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

209

English

If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini

notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not

Available, or Invalid Permissions.

Long press to end the call.

The display returns to the previous screen.

Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound

Private Phone Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line of

the display shows the telephone number.

1Use the keypad to enter the digits.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to insert

a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

The first text line of the display shows Extra

Digits, the second text line of the display shows

the entered extra digits.

Press the button.

If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a

negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and

returns to the previous screen.

The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the

top right corner. The first text line of the display

shows the telephone number with the over-dial

digits appended.

3Do one of the following.

•

Press to return to the Phone Call screen.

•

Long press to end the call.

Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound

Private Phone Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon

appears in the top right corner. The first text line of

the display shows the telephone number.

1Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter

the digits.

The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the

top right corner. The first text line of the display

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

210

English

shows the telephone number with the over-dial

digits appended.

Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. The

second line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode

211

English

Advanced Features in Connect Plus

Mode

Auto Fallback

Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to

continue to make and receive non-emergency calls

on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain

types of Connect Plus system failures.

If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to

roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search

process may result in your radio finding an operable

Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding

a “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for Auto

Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is

normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is

currently unable to communicate with either its site

controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback

mode, the repeater operates as a single digital

repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-

emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are

supported in Fallback Mode.

Indications of Auto Fallback Mode

When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you

hear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximately

once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting).

The display periodically shows a brief message,

“Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT on

the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup

Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make

other types of calls.

Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode

Note:

Calls are heard only by radios that are

monitoring the same Fallback channel and

selected to the same Group. Calls are not

networked to other sites or other repeaters.

Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts

are not available in Fallback mode. If you

press the emergency button in Fallback mode,

the radio provides an invalid key press tone.

Display-equipped radios also show the

message, “Feature not available”.

Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not

available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

212

English

call to a private contact, you will receive a

denial tone. At this point you should select a

desired group contact. Other non-supported

calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio

Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text

messaging, Location Updates, and packet

data calls.

Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is

not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or

more radio users press PTT at the same time

(or at almost the same time), it is possible that

both radios transmit until PTT is released. In

this event, it is possible that none of the

transmissions will be understood by receiving

radios.

Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal

functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish

to use (using the radio’s normal channel selection

method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It

is possible that the channel may be in use already by

another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a

busy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”.

You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call

contacts using your radio’s normal channel selection

method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback

Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other

Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently

selected to the same Multi-group.

Returning to Normal Operation

If the site returns to normal trunking operation while

you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio

automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a

registration “beep” when the radio successfully

registers. If you are in the range of an operable site

(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the

Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio)

to force your radio to search for and register on an

available site. If no other site is available, your radio

returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is

complete. If you drive out of coverage of your

Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode

(display indicates “Searching”).

Radio Check

If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if

another radio is active in a system without disturbing

the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification

is shown on the target radio.

This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases

or IDs.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

213

English

Sending a Radio Check

1Access the Radio Check feature.

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med Ra-

dio Check

button

1Press the programmed Radio

Check button.

2 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

to select.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select.

3 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Radio Check and

press to select.

The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the

request is in progress. The LED lights up solid

green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If the target radio is active in the system, a tone

sounds and the display briefly shows Target

Radio Available.

If the target radio is not active in the system, a

tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target

Radio Not Available.

Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen

when initiated via Menu.

Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via

the programmable button.

Remote Monitor

Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the

microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs

only). The green LED will blink once on the target

subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,

remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target

radio.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

214

English

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use

this feature.

Initiating Remote Monitor

Note:

Remote Monitor automatically stops after a

programmed duration or when there is any

attempt to initiate transmission, change

channels or power down the radio.

1Access the Remote Monitor feature.

Radio

Control

Steps

Program-

med Re-

mote

Monitor

Button

1Press the programmed Remote

Monitor button.

2 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

to select.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

Radio

Control

Steps

2 or to Contacts and press

to select.

3 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Manual Dial and

press to select.

5 or to Remote Mon. and

press to select.

The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The

second text line displays the Target Alias,

indicating the request is in progress. The LED

lights up blinking green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and

the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

215

English

Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from

the monitored radio for a programmed duration

and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by

target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio

sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative

indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor

Failed.

Scan

This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls

for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list.

When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the

status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.

Starting and Stopping Scan

Note:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or

Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same

Network ID as your currently selected zone. It

is important to note that even when the Scan

feature is turned on via this procedure, scan

may still be disabled for some (or all) groups

on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on

page 218 for more information.

You can start and stop scanning by pressing the

programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure

described next.

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Turn On or Turn Off and press

to select.

•The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.

•The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is

enabled.

•The display shows Scan Off if scan is

disabled.

•The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is

disabled.

Responding to a Transmission During a Scan

During scanning, your radio stops on a group where

activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for

any member in the scan list when idle on the control

channel.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

216

English

1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

2Press the PTT button during hang time.

The LED lights up solid green.

3Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

4Release the PTT button to listen.

If you do not respond within the hang time, the

radio returns to scanning other groups.

User Configurable Scan

If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add

and Remove the scan members from the Add

Member menu. A Scan List member must be a

regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All

Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned

to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus

Zone with the same Network ID as the currently

selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match

any Talkgroup that has been included in the current

Zone's Scan List.

Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by

pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.

This feature functions only when the radio is not

currently involved in a call. If you are presently

listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other

group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in

progress. Once your call is finished, your radio

returns to the control channel time slot and is able to

scan for groups that are in the scan list.

Turning Scan On or Off

Note:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or

Off for all zones with the same Network ID as

your currently selected zone. It is important to

note that even when the Scan feature is

turned on via this procedure, scan may still be

disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan

list. See the next section for more information.

If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your

display. When Scan is on and you are not

participating in a call, the LED blinks green and

yellow.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

217

English

The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on

how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a

Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the

feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed

so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu,

follow the procedure described next.

to access the menu.

or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Turn On or Turn Off and press

to select.

•The display shows Scan On momentarily if

scan is disabled.

•The display shows Scan Off momentarily if

scan is enabled.

Editing the Scan List

Note:

If the scan list entry happens to be the radio’s

currently selected group, the radio listens for

activity on this group regardless of whether the

list entry currently shows a check mark or not.

Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio

listens for activity on its Selected Group,

Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its Default

Emergency Revert Group (if configured for

one). This operation cannot be disabled. If

Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for

activity on enabled Zone Scan List members.

Your scan list determines which groups can be

scanned. The list is created when your radio is

programmed. If your radio has been programmed to

allow you to edit the scan list, you can,

• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the

list.

• Add and Remove the scan members from the Add

Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via

the Add Members Menu on page 219.

Note:

A Scan List member must be a regular Group

Contact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/

Network Wide All Call) that is currently

assigned to a Channel Selector position in a

Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID

as the currently selected Zone.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

218

English

The Talkgroup alias must not match any

Talkgroup that has been included in the

current Zone's Scan List.

to access the menu.

or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

3 or to the desired Group name.

If a check mark precedes the Group name, then

scan is currently enabled for this Group.

If there is no check mark preceding the Group

name, then scan is currently disabled for this

Group.

to select the desired Group.

The display shows Enable if scan is currently

disabled for the Group.

The display shows Disable if scan is currently

enabled for the Group.

5Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable)

and press to select.

Depending on which option was selected, the

radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan

Disabled as confirmation.

The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan

was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays

before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the

Group, the check mark is removed before the Group

name.

Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members

The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate

group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed

on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scan

candidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates”

described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes after

adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list.

If your radio has been programmed to allow you to

edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members

menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

219

English

selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list of

the currently selected zone.

to access the menu.

or to Scan option and press to select.

or to <Add Members> and press to

select.

The display shows “Add Members from Zone n” (n

= the Connect Plus zone number of the first

Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same

Network ID as your currently selected zone).

4Do one of the following.

• If the group you want to add to the scan list is

assigned to a channel selector position in that

zone, go to step 6.

• If the group you want to add to the scan list is

assigned to a channel selector position in a

different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.

5 or to scroll a list of Connect Plus zones

that have the same Network ID as the currently

selected zone.

6After locating the Connect Plus zone where the

desired group is assigned to a channel selector

position, press to select.

Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups

assigned to a channel position in that zone. The

groups on the list are called “scan candidates”,

because they can be added to the scan list of your

currently selected zone (or they are already on the

zone scan list).

If the zone does not have any groups that can be

added to the scan list, the radio displays No

Candidates.

7 or to scroll through the list of candidate

groups.

If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before

the group alias, this indicates the group is

currently on the scan list for the selected zone.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

220

English

If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately

before the alias, the group is not currently on the

scan list, but can be added.

Press when the desired group alias is

displayed.

If this group is not currently on the scan list for the

currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)

message is displayed.

If this group is already on the scan list for the

currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)

message is displayed.

Press to accept the displayed message (Add

or Delete).

If deleting a group from the list, you will know the

operation is successful because the plus sign (+)

will no longer display immediately before the alias.

If adding a group to the list, you will know the

operation is successful because the plus sign (+)

will display before the alias.

If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is

already full, the radio displays List Full. If this

should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group

from the scan list prior to adding a new one.

When finished, press as many times as

necessary to return to the desired menu.

Understanding Scan Operation

Note:

If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List

member from a different Zone and Call Hang

Timer expires before you are able to respond,

in order to respond, you must navigate to the

Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member

and start a new call.

There are some circumstances in which you can miss

calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you

miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does

not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a

normal scan operation for Connect Plus.

• Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan

icon on the display).

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

221

English

• Scan list member has been disabled via the menu

(see Editing the Scan List on page 218).

• You are participating in a call already.

•No member of the scanned group is registered at

your site (Multisite systems only).

Scan Talkback

If your radio scans into a call from the selectable

group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed

during the scanned call, the operation of the radio

depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or

disabled during radio programming. For more

information on how your radio is programmed,

contact your radio dealer (or your radio system

administrator).

Scan

Talkback

Disabled

The radio leaves the scanned call and

attempts to transmit on the contact for

the currently selected channel

position. After the Call Hang Time on

the currently selected contact expires,

the radio returns to the home channel

and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer.

The radio resumes group scan after its

Scan Hang Time Timer expires.

Scan

Talkback

Enabled

If the PTT button is pressed during the

Group Hang Time of the scanned call,

the radio attempts to transmit to the

scanned group.

Note:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not

assigned to a channel position in the currently

selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of

the call, switch to the proper zone and then

select the channel position of the group to talk

back to that group.

Contacts Settings

Note:

You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for

Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber

IDs can only be performed by your dealer.

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,

you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on

that channel. Only target radios with the same

Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key

ID as your radio are able to unscramble the

transmission.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

222

English

Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on your

radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that

you use to initiate a call.

Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100

contacts. The following contact types are available:

• Private Call

• Group Call

•Multigroup Call

• Site All Call Voice

• Site All Call Text

• Dispatch Call

The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text

message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party

Text Message Server.

Making a Private Call from Contacts

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described next to select the

required subscriber alias:

• Select the subscriber alias directly.

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID.

•Use the Manual Dial menu.

•

or to Manual Dial and press

to select.

• If there was previously dialed subscriber

alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along

with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to

edit/enter the ID. Press to select.

4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

5Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display shows

the destination alias.

6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

223

English

7Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green and the display shows the transmitting

user's ID.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows Call

Ended.

Making a Call Alias Search

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to

retrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3Key in the first character of the required alias, and

then press or to locate the required alias.

4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

5Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display shows

the destination alias.

6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

and speak clearly into the microphone.

7Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinks

green.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined

period of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Adding a New Contact

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

224

English

or to New Contact and press to

select.

4Use the keypad to enter the contact number and

press to confirm.

5Use the keypad to enter the contact name and

press to confirm.

6If adding a Radio Contact, or to the

required ringer type and press to select.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the

display shows Contact Saved.

Call Indicator Settings

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a

received Call Alert.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

or to the required tone and press to

select.

appears beside selected tone.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

225

English

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private

Calls

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received

Private Call.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

or to Private Call and press to

select.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text

Message

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received

Text Message.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

or to Text Message and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

226

English

The current tone is indicated by a .

or to the required tone and press to

select.

appears beside selected tone.

Selecting a Ring Alert Type

Note:

The programmed Ring Alert Type button is

assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

You can program the radio calls to one

predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is

disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon.

If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert

type is displayed.

The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentary

ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a

repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate,

the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any

incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or

Message). It sounds like a good key tone or missed

call.

For radios with batteries that support the vibrate

feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the

available Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring,

Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.

For radios with batteries that do not support the

vibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt

clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The

available Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.

You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one

of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to

access the Ring Alert Type menu.

a) Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select.

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press

to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

227

English

c) Press or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

d) Press or to Tones/Alerts and press

to select.

e) Press or to Ring Alert Type and

press to select.

f) Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select.

Configuring Vibrate Style

Note:

The programmed Vibrate Style button is

assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip

is attached to the radio with a battery that supports

the vibrate feature.

You can configure the vibrate style by performing one

of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to

access the Vibrate Style menu.

a) Press or to Short, Medium, or Long

and press to select.

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press

to select.

c) Press or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

d) Press or to Tones/Alerts and press

to select.

e) Press or to Vibrate Style and press

to select.

f) Press or to Short, Medium, or Long

and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

228

English

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

You can program your radio to continually alert you

when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done

by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume

over time. This feature is known as Escalert.

Call Log Features

Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,

answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log

feature to view and manage recent calls.

You can perform the following tasks in each of your

call lists:

• Delete

• View Details

Viewing Recent Calls

The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to preferred list and press to

select.

The display shows the most recent entry at the top

of the list.

4 or to view the list.

Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with

the current selected alias or ID.

Deleting a Call from a Call List

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to the required list and press to

select.

When you select a call list and it contains no

entries, the display shows List Empty, and

sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page

152).

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

229

English

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

or to Delete and press to select.

6Do one of the following:

•

Press to select Yes to delete the entry.

The display shows Entry Deleted.

•

or to No, and press the button to

return to the previous screen.

Viewing Details from a Call List

to access the menu.

or to Call Log and press to select.

or to the required list and press to

select.

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

or to View Details and press to

select.

Display shows details.

Call Alert Operation

Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio

user to call you back when they are able to do so.

This feature is accessible through the menu via

Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch

Access button.

Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert

When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the

notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of

the calling radio on the display.

When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED

blinks yellow, do one of the following:

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

230

English

• Press the PTT button while the display still

shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to

respond with a Private Call.

•

Press to exit the Notification List. The alert

is moved to the Missed Call Log.

See Notification List on page 270 for details about

the Notification List.

See Call Log Features on page 229 for details

about the Missed Call List.

Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

to access the menu.

or to Contacts and press to select.

3Use one of the steps described next to select the

required subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias directly

• or to the required subscriber alias

and press to select.

•use the Manual Dial menu

•

or to Manual Dial and press

to select.

• The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be

displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and

press .

or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber

Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber

alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been

sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio is

sending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

display shows Call Alert Successful.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,

the display shows Call Alert Failed.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

231

English

Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button

Press the programmed One Touch Access

button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.

The display shows Call Alert and the

subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert

has been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio is

sending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

display shows Call Alert Successful.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,

the display shows Call Alert Failed.

Emergency Operation

Note:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent

with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases

it automatically exits silent operation after the

Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is

finished. The exception to this rule is when

Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency

Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency

Type. If your radio is programmed in this

manner, the silent operation continues until

you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or

the button configured for Emergency Off.

Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts

are not supported when operating in Connect

Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more

information see the Auto Fallback on page

212.

An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical

situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time

on any screen display, even when there is activity on

the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button

initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The

programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated

by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The

Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio.

Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for

the programmed Emergency button, except for long

press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75

seconds.

Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75

seconds.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

232

English

The Emergency button is assigned with the

Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for

the assigned operation of the Emergency button.

• If the short press for the Emergency button is

assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the

long press for the Emergency button is assigned

to exit the Emergency mode.

• If the long press for the Emergency button is

assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the

short press for the Emergency button is assigned

to exit the Emergency mode.

When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone,

it supports three Emergency modes:

Emergency

Call

You must press the PTT button to

talk on the assigned emergency time

slot.

Emergency

Call with

Voice to

For the first transmission on the

assigned emergency time slot, the

microphone is automatically

unmuted and you may talk without

pressing the PTT button. The

microphone stays “hot” in this

fashion for a time period

programmed into the radio. For

subsequent transmissions in the

same Emergency call, you must

press the PTT button.

Emergency

Alert

An Emergency Alert is not a voice

call. It is an emergency notification

that is sent to radios that are

configured to receive these alerts.

The radio sends an emergency alert

via the control channel of the

currently registered site. The

Emergency Alert is received by

radios in the Connect Plus network

that are programmed to receive

them (no matter which network site

they are registered to).

Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned

to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each

Emergency mode has the following types:

Regular Radio initiates an Emergency and

shows audio and/or visual indicators.

Silent Radio initiates an Emergency without

any audio or visual indicators. The radio

suppresses all audio or visual

indications of the Emergency until you

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

233

English

press the PTT button to start a voice

transmission.

Silent

with

Voice

The same as Silent operation, except

that the radio also unmutes for some

voice transmissions.

Receiving an Incoming Emergency

Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert

tone and also display information about the incoming

Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the

incoming Emergency, the display shows the

Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon,

the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the

Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the

Emergency, and one additional line of information.

The additional information is the name of the zone

that contains the Group Contact.

At the present time, the radio displays only the most

recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is

received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the

details for the new Emergency replace the details of

the previous Emergency.

Depending on how your radio has been programmed,

the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen)

will stay on your radio’s display even after the

Emergency ends. You can save the emergency

details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the

emergency details as described in the following

sections.

Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List

Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows

you to view the details again at a later time by

selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.

1While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List)

screen is displayed, press .

The Exit Alarm List screen displays.

2Perform one of the following actions:

•

Select Yes and press to save the

emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit

the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.

•

Select No and press to return to the

Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

234

English

Deleting the Emergency Details

1While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,

press .

The Delete screen displays.

2Perform one of the following actions:

•

Select Yes and press to delete the

emergency details.

•

Select No and press to return to the

Emergency Details screen.

Responding to an Emergency Call

Note:

If you do not respond to the Emergency Call

within the time allotted for the Emergency Call

Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you

want to speak to the group after the

Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must

first select the channel position assigned to

the group (if not already selected). Then,

press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to

the group.

1When receiving an Emergency Call, press any

button to stop all Emergency Call received

indications.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to initiate a voice

transmission on the Emergency group.

All radios that are monitoring this group hear your

transmission.

4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)

and speak clearly into the microphone.

The LED lights up green.

5Release the PTT button to listen.

When the emergency initiating radio responds, the

LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,

the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your

display.

Responding to an Emergency Alert

Note:

The Group contact used for the Emergency

Alert should not be used for voice

communication. This could prevent other

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

235

English

radios from sending and receiving Emergency

Alerts on the same group.

An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the

user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the

alert by initiating a private call to the radio who

declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a

designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert,

initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The

proper response is determined by your organization

and the individual situation.

Initiating an Emergency Call

Note:

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display

any audio or visual indicators during

Emergency mode until you press the PTT

button to initiate a voice transmission.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does

not initially display any audio or visual

indicators that the radio is in Emergency

mode. However, your radio unmutes for the

transmissions of radios responding to your

emergency. The emergency indicators only

appear once you press the PTT button to

initiate a voice transmission from your radio.

For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice”

operation, the radio automatically exits silent

operation after the Emergency Call is finished.

1Press the programmed Emergency button.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3Press the PTT button to initiate a voice

transmission on the Emergency group.

When you release the PTT button, the Emergency

call continues for the time allotted for the

Emergency Call Hang Time.

If you press the PTT button during this time, the

Emergency call continues.

Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow

Your radio must be programmed for this type of

operation.

When enabled for this operation, when you press the

programmed Emergency button, and when your

radio receives the time slot assignment, the

microphone is automatically activated without

pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

236

English

state is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” applies

to the first voice transmission from your radio during

the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in

the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT

button.

1Press the programmed Emergency button.

2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0

cm) from your mouth.

3The microphone remains active for the “hot mic”

time specified in your radio's codeplug

programming.

During this time, the LED lights up green.

4Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than

the programmed duration.

Initiating an Emergency Alert

Note:

If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or

“Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audio

or visual indications that it is sending an

Emergency Alert. If programmed for “Silent”,

the silent operation continues indefinitely until

you press PTT or the button configured for

“Emergency Off”. If programmed for “Silent

with Voice”, the radio automatically cancels

silent operation when the site controller

broadcasts the Emergency Alert.

Press the orange Emergency button.

Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site

controller, the radio’s display shows the

Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the

Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm.

Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is

being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive

indicator tone sounds and the radio’s display shows

Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful,

a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio

displays Alarm Failed.

Exiting Emergency Mode

Note:

If the Emergency call ends due to the

expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but

the emergency condition is not over, press the

Emergency button again to restart the

process.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

237

English

If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the

programmed Emergency button, your radio

automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a

response from the Connect Plus system.

If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the

programmed Emergency button, your radio will be

assigned a channel automatically when one becomes

available. Once your radio has transmitted a

message indicating the emergency, you cannot

cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed

the button by accident or the emergency no longer

exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned

channel. When you release the PTT button, the

Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency

Call Hang Time expires.

If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice

to Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain your

error, then press and release the PTT button to

discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is

discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time

expires.

Man Down Alarms

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

Man Down Alarms are not supported when

operating in Fallback mode. For more

information see the Auto Fallback on page

212.

This section describes the Connect Plus Man Down

Feature. This is a purchasable feature that may or

may not apply to your radio.

Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled and

programmed for one or more of the Man Down

Alarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator can

tell you whether or not this applies to your radio and

which specific Man Down Alarms have been enabled

and programmed.

If your radio has been programmed for one or more of

the following Man Down Alarms, it is important for you

to understand how the Alarm works, what indication

(tones) your radio provides, and the action you should

take.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

238

English

The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alert

others when you might be in danger. This is

accomplished by programming your radio to detect a

certain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement,

depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/are

enabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movement

type, and if the condition is not corrected in a certain

period of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (if

so programmed). At this point you should immediately

take one or more of the corrective actions discussed

below, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/

have been enabled for your radio. If you do not take

corrective action within a certain period of time, your

radio automatically starts an Emergency (either an

Emergency Call or Emergency Alert).

•Tilt Alarm – When your radio is tilted at or beyond

a specified angle for a period of time, it plays an

Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the

radio from automatically starting an Emergency

Call or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to the

vertical position immediately.

•Anti-Movement Alarm – When your radio is

motionless for a period of time, it plays an Alert

Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio

from automatically starting an Emergency Call or

Emergency Alert, move the radio immediately.

•Movement Alarm – When your radio is in motion

for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so

programmed). To prevent the radio from

automatically starting an Emergency Call or

Emergency Alert, stop the radio’s motion

immediately.

Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you

which of the above alarms (if any) has been enabled

through radio programming. It is possible to enable

both the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case,

the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the first

movement violation.

Instead of taking the corrective actions discussed

above, you can also prevent the radio from starting

the Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using a

programmable button, if your radio has been

configured in this manner. This is discussed in the

next two sections.

Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only. The programmed Man Down

button and Man Down settings are assigned

via CPS. Check with your dealer or system

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

239

English

administrator to determine how your radio has

been programmed.

If you enable Man Down to maximum

sensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, the

radio automatically restricts Vibrate Style to

medium. This function prevents high Vibrate

Style from initiating the Man Down emergency

feature.

The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms On

and Off depends on how your radio is programmed. If

programmed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button,

use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On

and Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarms

enabled for your radio.

When using the programmable button to toggle the

Man Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone that

rises in pitch and displays a brief confirmation

message.

When using the programmable button to toggle the

Man Down Alarms Off, your radio plays a tone that

falls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

In order to hear the tones described above when

turning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, the

MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Board

must both be enabled for keypad tones.

If your radio has been programmed so that Man

Down Alarms can be turned On and Off via the menu,

perform the following procedure.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

or to Man Down Alarm and press to

select.

If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, the

Enable option is shown.

If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, the

Disable option is shown.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

240

English

or to Enable or Disable and press

to select.

Resetting the Man Down Alarms

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

If your radio has been programmed with either a Man

Down Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarms

menu option, it is possible to reset the Man Down

Alarms without turning them On or Off. This stops any

Man Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and it

also resets the Alarm timers. However, it is still

necessary to correct the movement violation by taking

the appropriate corrective action described in the Man

Down Alarms section. If the movement violation is not

corrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone starts

playing again.

The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarms

depends on how your radio is programmed. If

programmed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button,

use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. This

applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for

your radio.

When using the programmable button to reset the

Man Down Alarms, the radio shows a brief

confirmation message.

If your radio has been programmed so that Man

Down Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow the

procedure below.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

or to Man Down Alarm and press to

select.

or to Reset and press to select.

The radio displays a brief confirmation message.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

241

English

Beacon Feature

This section describes the Beacon feature. The

Beacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, a

purchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio System

Administrator can tell you if the Beacon feature

applies to your radio.

If your radio has been enabled and programmed for

one or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also be

enabled for the Beacon feature.

If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Call

or Emergency Alert due to one of the Man Down

Alarms, and if your radio is also enabled for the

Beacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit a

high pitched tone approximately once every ten

seconds. The interval can vary depending on whether

you are talking on your radio. The purpose of the

Beacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If your

radio has also been enabled for the “Visual Beacon”,

the radio’s backlight comes on for a few seconds

every time the Beacon tone plays.

You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon tone

by using a programmable button, if your radio has

been configured in this manner. This is discussed in

the next two sections. If your radio does not have the

programmable button or menu option, you can stop

the Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then on

again, or by changing to a different zone (if your radio

has been programmed for more than one zone).

Turning Beacon On and Off

The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Off

depends on how your radio is programmed. If

programmed with a Beacon On/Off button, use the

button to toggle the Beacon On and Off.

• When using the programmable button to toggle

the Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that rises

in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

• When using the programmable button to toggle

the Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls in

pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

In order to hear the tones described above when

turning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBO

radio and Connect Plus Option Board must both be

enabled for keypad tones. If your radio has been

programmed so that the Beacon can be turned On

and Off via the menu, follow the procedure below.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

242

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

or to Beacon and press to select.

If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable option

is shown.

If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable option

is shown.

or to Enable or Disable and press

to select.

The radio shows a brief message to confirm that

Man Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).

Resetting the Beacon

If your radio has been programmed with either the

Beacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, it

is possible to reset the Beacon. This stops the

Beacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) without

turning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure for

resetting the Beacon depends on how your radio is

programmed. If programmed with a Beacon Reset

button, use the button to Reset the Beacon. When

using the programmable button to reset the Man

Down Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmation

message. If your radio has been programmed so that

the Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow the

procedure below.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

or to Beacon and press to select.

or to Reset and press to select.

The radio displays a brief confirmation message.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

243

English

Text Message Features

Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text

message, from another radio or a text message

application.

The maximum length of characters for sending a text

message, including the subject line (seen when

receiving message from an e-mail application),

depends on CPS configuration which can be

configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio

can receive a text message with maximum length of

280 characters.

If user forwards a text message with characters more

than the maximum length, the text message will be

truncated to the maximum length.

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity

timer expires.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Writing and Sending a Text Message

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio

Controls

Steps

Program-

med Text

Message

button

Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Compose and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

244

English

Press once message is composed.

5If you are sending the message, select the

recipient by

•

or to the required alias and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returns

you to the Resend option screen (see Managing

Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).

Sending a Quick Text Message

Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text

messages as programmed by your dealer.

While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can

edit each message before sending it.

If you are sending the message, select the

recipient by

•

or to the required alias and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

245

English

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returns

you to the Resend option screen (see Managing

Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).

Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch

Access Button

Press the programmed One Touch Access

button to send a predefined Quick Text message

to a predefined alias.

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display

shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you

to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-

Send Text Messages on page 248).

Accessing the Drafts Folder

You can save a text message to send it at a later

time.

If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the

radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen

while you are in the process of writing or editing a text

message, your current text message is automatically

saved to the Drafts folder.

The most recent saved text message is always added

to the top of the Drafts list.

The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last

saved messages. When the folder is full, the next

saved text message automatically replaces the oldest

text message in the folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Viewing a Saved Text Message

1Access the Text Message feature.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

246

English

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message

Press again while viewing the message.

or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method.

Press once message is composed.

5Select the message recipient by

•

or to the required alias and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

247

English

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to

the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send

Failed icon.

Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

or to Delete and press to delete the

text message.

Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

You can select one of the following options while at

the Resend option screen:

• Resend

• Forward

•Edit

Resending a Text Message

Press to resend the same message to the

same subscriber/group alias or ID.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows the positive mini notice.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

248

English

If the message cannot be sent, the display shows

the negative mini notice.

Forwarding a Text Message

Select Forward to send the message to another

subscriber/group alias or ID.

or to Forward and press to select.

2Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

Editing a Text Message

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.

or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

2Use the keypad to edit your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method.

Press once message is composed.

4Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do

one of the following.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

249

English

•

or to Send, and press to send the

message.

•

or to Save, and press to save the

message to the Drafts folder.

•

to edit the message.

•

again to choose between deleting the

message or saving it to the Drafts folder.

5If you are sending the message, select the

recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

•

or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows

Number:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved

in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is

always added to the top of the Sent Items list.

The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a

maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the

folder is full, the next sent text message automatically

replaces the oldest text message in the folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Viewing a Sent Text Message

1Access the Text Message feature.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

250

English

Radio

Controls

Steps

Program-

med Text

Message

button

Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Sent Items and press to

select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

The icon at the top right corner of the screen

indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item

Icons on page 194).

Sending a Sent Text Message

You can select one of the following options while

viewing a sent text message:

• Resend

• Forward

•Edit

• Delete

Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to one of the following options and

press to select.

Option Steps

Forward Select Forward to send the selected

text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a

Text Message on page 249).

Edit Select Edit to edit the selected text

message before sending it (see Ed-

iting a Text Message on page 249).

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

251

English

Option Steps

Delete Select Delete to delete the text

message.

Resend Select Resend to resend the select-

ed text message to the same sub-

scriber/group alias or ID.

The display shows Sending Mes‐

sage, confirming that the same mes-

sage is being sent to the same tar-

get radio.

If the message is sent successfully,

a tone sounds and the display

shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a

low tone sounds and the display

shows Message Send Failed.

If the message fails to send, the ra-

dio returns you to the Resend option

screen. Press to resend the

message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID.

Option Steps

Note:

If you exit the message

sending screen while the

message is being sent, the

radio updates the status of

the message in the Sent

Items folder without provid-

ing any indication in the dis-

play or via sound.

Note:

If the radio changes mode or

powers down before the sta-

tus of the message in Sent

Items is updated, the radio

cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and au-

tomatically marks it with a

Send Failed icon.

Note:

The radio supports a maxi-

mum of five (5) In-Progress

messages at one time. Dur-

ing this period, the radio

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

252

English

Option Steps

cannot send any new mes-

sage and automatically

marks it with a Send Failed

icon.

If you exit the message sending screen while the

message is being sent, the radio updates the

status of the message in the Sent Items folder

without providing any indication in the display or

via sound.

If the radio changes mode or powers down before

the status of the message in Sent Items is

updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and automatically marks it

with a Send Failed icon.

The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this

period, the radio cannot send any new message

and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.

Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Sent Items and press to

select.

When you select Sent Items and it contains no

text messages, the display shows List Empty,

and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned

on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page

152).

or to Delete All and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

253

English

4Choose one of the following.

•

or to Yes and press to select. The

display shows positive mini notice.

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Receiving a Text Message

When your radio receives a message, the display

shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the

sender and the Message icon.

You can select one of the following options when

receiving a text message:

• Read

• Read Later

•Delete

Reading a Text Message

or to Read? and press to select.

Selected message in the Inbox opens.

2Do one of the following:

•

Press to return to the Inbox.

•

Press a second time to reply, forward, or

delete the text message.

Managing Received Text Messages

Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The

Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30

messages.

Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to

the most recently received.

Your radio supports the following options for text

messages:

• Reply

• Forward

•Delete

• Delete All

Note:

If the channel type is not a match, you can

only forward, delete, or delete all Received

messages.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

254

English

Long press at any time to return to the

Home screen.

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

to access the menu.

or to Messages and press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or toview the messages.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to select the current message, and

press again to reply, forward, or delete

that message.

•

Long press to return to the Home screen.

Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox

1Access the Text Message feature.

Radio

Controls

Steps

Program-

med Text

Message

button

Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Press once more to access the sub-menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

255

English

5Do one of the following:

•

or to Reply and press to select.

•

or to Quick Reply and press to

select.

A blinking cursor appears.

6Use your keypad to write/edit your message.

Press once message is composed.

The display shows Sending Message, confirming

your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds

and the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds

and the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns

you to the Resend option screen (see Managing

Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).

Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Press once more to access the sub-menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

256

English

or to Delete and press to select.

or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows Message Deleted, and the

screen returns to the Inbox.

Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

1Access the Text Message feature by performing

one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols

Steps

Programmed

Text Message

button

Press the programmed Text

Message button.

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

or to Inbox and press to select.

When you select Inbox and it contains no text

messages, the display shows List Empty, and

sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page

152).

or to Delete All and press to

select.

or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows Inbox Cleared.

Privacy

If enabled, this feature helps to prevent

eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel

by the use of a software-based scrambling solution.

The signaling and user identification portions of a

transmission are not scrambled.

Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current

channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled

transmission, although this is not a necessary

requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a

privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

257

English

still able to receive clear (unscrambled)

transmissions.

Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission,

your radio must be programmed to have the same

Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the

transmitting radio.

If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a

different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at

all (Enhanced Privacy).

If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home

screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except

when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency

call or alarm.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is

transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is

receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.

You can access this feature by performing one of the

following actions:

• Pressing the programmed Privacy button to

toggle privacy on or off.

•Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps

described next.

Note:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy

feature. Check with your dealer or system

administrator for more information.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings or or to

Connect Plus and press to select.

4 or to Enhanced Privacy.

If the display shows Turn On, press to

enable Privacy. The radio displays a message

confirming your selection.

If the display shows Turn Off, press to

disable Privacy. The radio displays a message

confirming your selection.

If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the

secure or unsecure icon appears on the status

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

258

English

bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving

an Emergency Alert.

Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call

Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy

button or by using the menu. Your radio must have

the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected

channel position to send a privacy-enabled

transmission. When privacy is enabled for the

currently selected channel position, all voice

transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled.

This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back

during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call,

and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same

Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to

unscramble the transmission.

Security

You can enable or disable any radio in the system.

For example, you might want to disable a stolen

radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable

that radio, when it is recovered.

Note:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is

limited to radios with these functions enabled.

Check with your dealer or system

administrator for more information.

Radio Disable

1Access this feature by

Radio

Controls

Steps

Radio Dis-

able but-

ton

1Press the programmed Radio

Disable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select. The entries

are alphabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described

next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

259

English

Radio

Controls

Steps

• Select the required alias or ID

directly.

• or to the required

alias or ID and press

to select.

•Use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Di‐

al and press to se-

lect.

• or to Radio Num‐

ber and press to se-

lect.

• The first line of the display

shows Radio Number:.

The second line of the dis-

play shows a blinking cur-

Radio

Controls

Steps

sor. Use the keypad to en-

ter the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

4 or to Radio Disable

and press to select.

The display shows Radio Disable: <Target

Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and

the display shows Radio Disable Successful.

If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds

and the display shows Radio Disable Failed.

Radio Enable

1Access this feature by

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

260

English

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

Radio

Enable

button

1Press the programmed Radio Ena-

ble button.

2 or to the required alias or ID

and press to select.

Radio

menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted.

3Use one of the steps described next

to select the required subscriber

alias or ID

• Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly.

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to

select.

•Use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.

• or to Radio Number

and press to select.

• The first line of the display

shows Radio Number:. The

second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Use

the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

261

English

Radio

Con-

trols

Steps

4 or to Radio Enable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber

Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and

the display shows Radio Enable Successful.

If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds

and the display shows Radio Enable Failed.

Password Lock Features

If enabled, this feature only allows you access your

radio if the correct password is entered upon

powering up.

Accessing the Radio from Password

1Power up the radio.

The radio sounds a continuous tone.

2Do one of the following:

• Enter your current four-digit password with the

radio’s keypad. The display shows . Press

to proceed.

• Enter your current four-digit password. Press

or to edit each digit’s numeric value.

Each digit changes to . Press to move to

next digit. Press to confirm your selection.

You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit

entered. Press to remove each on the

display. The radio sounds a negative indicator

tone, if you press when the line is empty, or if

you press more than four digits.

If the password is correct, the radio proceeds to

power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page

27.

If the password is incorrect, the display shows

Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

262

English

After the third incorrect password, the display

shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio

Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks

yellow.

Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call,

including emergency calls, in locked state.

Turning the Password Lock On or Off

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5Enter the four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password

on page 262.

Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display shows

Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the

previous menu.

7If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, press to enable/disable password

lock.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Unlocking the Radio from Locked State

1If your radio was powered down after being in the

locked state, power up the radio.

A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.

The display shows Radio Locked.

2Wait for 15 minutes.

Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked

state when you power up.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

263

English

3Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio from

Password on page 262.

Changing the Password

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5Enter the four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password

on page 262.

Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display shows

Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the

previous menu.

7If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, or to Change Pwd and press

to select.

8Enter a new four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password

on page 262.

9Reenter the previously entered four-digit

password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio

from Password on page 262.

Press to proceed.

If the reentered password matches the new

password entered earlier, the display shows

Password Changed.

If the reentered password does NOT match the

new password entered earlier, the display shows

Passwords Do Not Match.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

264

English

The screen automatically returns to the previous

menu.

Bluetooth Operation

Note:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related

features are disabled and the Bluetooth device

database is erased.

This feature allows you to use your radio with a

Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless

Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both

Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32

feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path

between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled

device.

It is not recommended that you leave your radio

behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to

work with a high degree of reliability when they are

separated.

At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone

quality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. To

correct this problem, simply position your radio and

Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within

the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish

clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function

has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range.

Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous

Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled

devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and

a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with

Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not

supported.

Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s

user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled device’s full capabilities.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to My Status and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

265

English

The display shows On and Off. The current status

is indicated by a .

4Do one of the following:

•

or to On and press to select. The

display shows On and a appears left of the

selected status.

•

or to Off and press to select. The

display shows Off and a appears left of the

selected status.

Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device

Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or

press during the finding and connecting

operation as this cancels the operation.

1Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place

it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled device’s user manual.

On your radio, press to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

5Do one of the following:

• or to the required device and press

to select.

• or to Find Devices to locate available

devices. or to the required device and

press to select.

or to Connect and press to select.

Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your

Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional

steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective

Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

If successful, the radio display shows

<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appears

besides the connected device. The Bluetooth

Connected icon appears on the status bar.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

266

English

If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting

Failed.

Note:

If pin code is required, use the same entry

method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from

Password on page 262.

Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode)

Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the

finding and connecting operation as this may cancel

the operation.

1Turn Bluetooth On.

See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 141.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Find Me and press to select.

Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This

is called Discoverable Mode.

5Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it

with your radio.

Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s

user manual.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device

On your radio, press to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to Disconnect and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

267

English

Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.

Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require

additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective

Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A

positive indicator tone sounds and disappears

beside the connected device. The Bluetooth

Connected icon disappears on the status bar.

Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker

and Bluetooth Device

You can toggle audio routing between internal radio

speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch

button.

•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio

to Radio.

•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio

to Bluetooth.

Viewing Device Details

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to View Details and press to

select.

Editing Device Name

You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled

devices.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

268

English

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to Edit Name and press to select.

6Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press to

change text entry method.

A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type

the required zone.

7The display shows Device Name Saved.

Deleting Device Name

You can remove a disconnected device from the list

of Bluetooth-enabled devices.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to Devices and press to select.

or to the required device and press

to select.

or to Delete and press to select.

The display shows Device Deleted.

Bluetooth Mic Gain

Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled

device’s microphone gain value.

to access the menu.

or to Bluetooth and press to select.

or to BT Mic Gain and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

269

English

4 or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current

values.

To edit values, press to select.

5 or to increase or to decrease values and

press to select.

Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode

Note:

The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode

can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO

CPS. If enabled, the Bluetooth item will not

be displayed in the Menu and you will not be

able to use any Bluetooth programmable

button features.

Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your

radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. It

enables dedicated devices to use your radio position

in the process of Bluetooth-based location.

Notification List

Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your

“unread” events on the channel, such as unread text

messages, missed calls, and call alerts.

The Notification icon appears on the status bar when

the Notification List has one or more events.

The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread

events. When it is full, the next event automatically

replaces the oldest event.

Note:

After the events are read, they are removed

from the Notification List.

Accessing the Notification List

to access the menu.

or to Notification and press to

select.

or to the required event and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

270

English

Long press to return to the Home Screen.

Wi-Fi Operation

Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-

Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio

firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language

packs and voice announcement.

Turning Wi-Fi On or Off

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is

assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing one

of the following actions.

•Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.

Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or

Turning Off Wi-Fi.

•Access this feature via the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to

select.

c) Press or to WiFi Status and press

to select.

Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows

beside Enabled.

Press to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears

from beside Enabled.

Connecting to a Network Access Point

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

271

English

When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans and

connects to a network access point.

You can also connect to a network access point via

the menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

4Press or to a network access point and

press to select.

Press or to Connect and press to

select.

Enter the password and press .

When the connection is successful, the radio

displays a notice and the network access point is

saved into the profile list.

Refreshing the Network List

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

•Perform the following actions to refresh the

network list.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to

select.

Press or to Networks and press

to select.

When you enter the Networks menu, the radio

automatically refreshes the network list.

•If you are already in the Networks menu, perform

the following action to refresh the network list.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

272

English

Press or to Refresh and press to

select.

The radio refreshes and displays the latest

network list.

Adding a Network

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

If a preferred network is not in the available network

list, perform the following actions to add a network.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

Press or to Add Network and press

to select.

5Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press

Press or to Open and press to select.

Enter the password and press .

The radio displays to indicate that the

network is successfully saved.

Viewing Details of Network Access Points

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only.

Perform the following actions to view details of

network access points.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

273

English

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

4Press or to a network access point and

press to select.

Press or to View Details and press

to select.

For a connected network access point, the Service

Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media

Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet

Protocol (IP) address are displayed.

For a non-connected network access point, the

Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode

are displayed.

Removing Network Access Points

Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR

7580e only. Enterprise network access points

that are added via CPS can only be removed

via CPS.

Perform the following actions to remove network

access points from the profile list.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to WiFi and press to select.

Press or to Networks and press to

select.

4Press or to the selected network access

point and press to select.

Press or to Remove and press to

select.

Press or to Yes and press to select.

The radio displays to indicate that the

selected network access point is successfully

removed.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

274

English

Utilities

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if

needed.

Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to

toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure

described next to access this feature via the radio

menu.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to All Tones and press to select.

Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

275

English

or to Keypad Tones and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable keypad tones.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level

You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if

needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice

volume.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Vol. Offset and press to

select.

6 or to the required volume value.

The radio sounds a feedback tone with each

corresponding volume value.

7Do one of the following:

•

Press to keep the required displayed

volume value.

•

Press to exit without changing the current

volume offset settings.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

276

English

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if

needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Talk Permit and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Talk Permit

Tone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone

if needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

or to Power Up and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

277

English

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Power Up Alert

Tone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Power Level

You can customize your radio’s power setting to high

or low for each Connect Plus zone.

High enables communication with tower sites in

Connect Plus mode located at a considerable

distance from you. Low enables communication with

tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity.

Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle

transmit power level between high and low. Follow

the procedure described next to access this feature

via the radio menu.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press to

select.

3Press or to Radio Settings and press

to select.

Press or to Power and press to

select.

5Press or to the required setting and press

to select.

appears beside selected setting. At any time,

long press to return to the Home screen.

Screen returns to the previous menu.

Changing the Display Mode

You can change radio’s display mode between Day

or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of

the display.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

278

English

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.

Note:

or to change the selected option.

or to the required setting and press

to enable. appears besides selected setting.

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as

needed.

Note:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when

Auto Brightness is enabled.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

or to Brightness and press to

select.

The display shows a progress bar.

6Decrease display brightness by pressing or

increase the display brightness by pressing .

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

279

English

Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm

your entry.

Setting the Display Backlight Timer

You can set the the radio’s display backlight timer as

needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation

Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly.

Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the

backlight settings, or follow the procedure described

next to access this feature via the radio menu.

The display backlight and keypad backlighting are

automatically turned off if the LED indicator is

disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on

page 162).

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

or to Backlight Timer and press to

select.

You can use or to change the selected

option.

Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if

needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

280

English

or to Intro Screen and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the Introduction

Screen.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad

You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertent

key entry.

To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.

Option Steps

Locking

the Key-

pad

to access the menu.

Option Steps

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

4 or to Keypad Lock and

press to select.

You can also use or to change the

selected option.

Unlocking

the Key-

pad

Press followed by .

After the keypad is locked, the display shows

Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.

After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows

Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home

screen.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

281

English

Language

You can set your radio display to be in your required

language.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Languages and press to select.

You can also use or to change selected

option.

5 or to the required language and press

to enable. appears beside selected

language.

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off

You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if

needed.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to LED Indicator and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

282

English

Identifying Cable Type

You can select the type of cable your radio uses.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Cable Type and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

5The current cable type is indicated by a .

Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the

current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,

or programmable button press. This audio indicator

can be customized per customer requirements. This

is typically useful when the user is in a difficult

condition to read the content shown on the display.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Voice Announcement and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Voice Announcement.

The display shows beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

283

English

•

Press to disable Voice Announcement.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Menu Timer

Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu

before it automatically switches to the Home screen.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Display and press to select.

or to Menu Timer and press to

select.

or to the required setting and press

to select.

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain

automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It

suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a

preset value in order to provide a consistent level of

audio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to Mic AGC-D and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

284

English

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The display

shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Intelligent Audio

Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume

to overcome background noise in the environment,

inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise

sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and

does not affect Transmit audio.

Note:

This feature is not applicable during a

Bluetooth session.

to access the menu.

Radio

Con-

trol

Steps

Menu 1

to access the menu.

2 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.

4 or to Intelligent Audio

and press to select.

Note:

You can also use or to

change the selected option.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Intelligent

Audio. The display shows be-

side Enabled.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

285

English

Radio

Con-

trol

Steps

•

Press to disable Intelligent

Audio. The disappears from be-

side Enabled.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Intelligent Audio and press

to select.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Intelligent Audio. The

display shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

See Authorized Accessories List on page 307 for

recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories

with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar

performance.

Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On

or Off

This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback

in received calls.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to AF Suppressor and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

286

English

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

5Do one of the following.

•

Press to enable Acoustic Feedback

Suppressor. The display shows beside

Enabled.

•

Press to disable Acoustic Feedback

Suppressor. The disappears from beside

Enabled.

Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control

Feature On or Off

This feature allows you to enable the radio to

automatically monitor the microphone input and

adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio

clipping.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

or to Mic Distortion and press to

select.

5Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Microphone Dynamic

Distortion Control. The display shows beside

Enabled.

•

Press to disable Microphone Dynamic

Distortion Control. The disappears from

beside Enabled.

Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off

Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a

satellite navigation system that determines the radio’s

precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning

System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

287

English

(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System

(BDS).

Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle

the feature on or off.

Note:

Selected radio models may offer GPS,

GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is

configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or

system administrator to determine how your

radio has been programmed.

Press to access the menu.

Press or to Utilities and press to

select.

3Press or to Radio Settings and press

to select.

Press or to GPS and press to select.

Press to enable/disable GPS/GNSS.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page

184 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information.

Text Entry Configuration

You can configure the following settings for entering

text on your radio:

• Word Predict

• Word Correct

• Sentence Cap

• My Words

Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

• Numbers

• Symbols

• Predictive or Multi-Tap

• Language (If programmed)

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

288

English

Note:

Press at any time to return to the

previous screen or long press to return to

the Home Screen. The radio exits the current

screen once the inactivity timer expires.

Word Predict

Your radio can learn common word sequences that

you often enter. It then predicts the next word you

may want to use after you enter the first word of a

common word sequence into the text editor.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to Word Predict and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selected

option.

6Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Word Predict. The display

shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Word Predict. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Sentence Cap

Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter

in the first word for every new sentence.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

289

English

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to Sentence Cap and press to

select.

6Do one of the following:

•

Press to enable Sentence Cap. The

display shows beside Enabled.

•

Press to disable Sentence Cap. The

disappears from beside Enabled.

Viewing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into your radio’s

in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to

contain these words.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to List of Words and press to

select.

Display shows the list of custom words.

Editing Custom Word

You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

290

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to List of Words and press to

select.

Display shows the list of custom words.

or to the required word and press to

select.

or to Edit and press to select.

9Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word is

completed.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming

your custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the

display shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Adding Custom Word

You can add your own custom words into your radio’s

in-built dictionary.

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

291

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to Add New Word and press to

select.

Display shows the list of custom words.

7Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word is

completed.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming

your custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the

display shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds

and the display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Custom Word

You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

292

English

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to the required word and press to

select.

or to Delete and press to select.

8Choose one of the following.

•

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.

The display shows Entry Deleted.

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Deleting All Custom Words

You can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-

built.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

or to Text Entry and press to

select.

or to My Words and press to select.

or to Delete All and press to

select.

7Choose one of the following.

•

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.

The display shows Entry Deleted.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

293

English

•

or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Accessing General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

• Battery

• Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)

• Radio Model Number Index

• Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC

• Site Number

• Site Info

• Radio Alias and ID

• Firmware and Codeplug Versions

• GPS Information

Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the Home

screen. The radio exits the current screen once the

inactivity timer expires.

Accessing the Battery Information

Displays information on your radio battery.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Battery Info and press to

select.

The display shows the battery information.

For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads

Recondition Battery if the battery requires

reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the

reconditioning process, the display then shows the

battery information.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

294

English

Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)

Note:

The measurement on the display shows the

degree of tilt at the moment you press to

accept the Accelerometer option. If you

change the angle of the radio after pressing

, the radio does not change the

measurement shown on its display. It

continues to display the measurement taken

when was pressed.

If the portable radio has been enabled for the Man

Down Alarms, there is a menu option to check how

the radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpful

feature when the dealer or Radio System

Administrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect Plus

Option Board CPS to configure the activation angle

that will trigger the tilt alarm.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the Tilt

Alarm.

or to Accelerometer and press to

select.

The display shows the radio’s angle of tilt

(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) in

degrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, use

MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS to

configure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees

(which is the closest programmable value). The

Tilt Alarm timers are triggered when the Activation

Angle is 60 degrees, or greater.

Checking the Radio Model Number Index

This index number identifies your radio’s model-

specific hardware. Your radio system administrator

may ask for this number when preparing a new

Option Board codeplug for your radio.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

295

English

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Model Index and press to

select.

The display shows the Model Number Index.

Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA

Codeplug File

Follow the instructions below if your radio system

administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA

Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This

menu option only appears if the Option Board

received its last codeplug update OTA.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to OB OTA CPcrc and press to

select.

The display shows some letters and numbers.

Communicate this information to your radio

system administrator exactly as shown.

Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)

Note:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the

display shows Not Registered.

The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with

a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio

does not generally indicate the Site number. To

display the registered Site number, do the following:

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

296

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Site Number and press to

select.

The display shows the Network ID and the Site

Number.

Checking the Site Info

Note:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the

display shows Not Registered.

The Site Info feature provides information that can be

useful to a service technician. It consists of the

following information:

• Repeater number of current Control Channel

repeater.

• RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from

Control Channel repeater.

•Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater

(five numbers separated by commas).

If you are requested to use this feature, please report

the displayed information exactly as it appears on the

screen.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Site Info and press to select.

The display shows the Site Info.

Checking the Radio ID

This feature displays the ID of your radio.

Follow the procedure described next to access this

feature via the radio screen.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

297

English

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to My ID and press to select.

The display shows the radio ID.

Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug

Version

Displays the firmware version on your radio.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Versions and press to select.

The display a list with the following information:

• (Radio) Firmware Version

• (Radio) Codeplug Version

• Option Board Firmware Version

• Option Board Frequency Version

• Option Board Hardware Version

• Option Board Codeplug Version

Checking for Updates

Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain

files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency

File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air.

Note:

Check with the dealer or network administrator

to determine whether this feature has been

enabled for your radio.

Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to

show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC,

Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file

version via a menu option. In addition, display radios

that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer

can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

298

English

file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file

that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system

messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of

the file’s packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has

a pending file, the menu provides options to:

• See the version number of the pending file.

• See what percentage of packets has been

collected so far.

•Request the Connect Plus radio to resume

collecting file packets.

If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air

file transfer, there may be times when the radio

automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying

the radio user. While the radio is collecting file

packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio

displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home

Screen status bar.

Note:

The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file

packets and receive calls at the same time. If

you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and

release the PTT button. This causes the radio

to request a call on the selected Contact

Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer

for that radio until the process resumes at a

later time.

There are several things that can make the file

transfer process start again. The first example applies

to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply

only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board

Firmware File:

• The radio system administrator re-initiates the

over-the-air file transfer.

• The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires,

which causes the Option Board to automatically

resume the process of collecting packets.

•The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user

requests the file transfer to resume via the menu

option.

After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all

file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired

file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an

automatic process and does not require a radio reset.

For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an

automatic process that will cause a brief interruption

to service as the Option Board loads the new

codeplug information and re-acquires a network site.

How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option

Board firmware file depends on how the radio has

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

299

English

been configured by the dealer or system

administrator. The radio will either upgrade

immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will

wait until the next time that the user turns the radio

on.

Note:

Check with your dealer or system

administrator to determine how your radio has

been programmed.

The process of upgrading to a new Option Board

firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires

the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio.

Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be

able to make or receive calls until the process is

completed.

Firmware File

Firmware Up to Date

Note:

If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to

Date (and if the radio has partially collected a

more recent Option Board firmware file

version) the radio displays a list with additional

options; Version, %Received, and Download.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to Firmware and press to select.

The display shows Firmware is Up to Date.

Pending Firmware – Version

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

300

English

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to Firmware and press to select.

or to Version and press to select.

If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,

the display shows the pending firmware version

number.

If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,

the display shows Firmware is Up to Date.

Pending Firmware – % Received

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to Firmware and press to select.

or to %Received and press to select.

The screen displays the percentage of firmware

file packets collected so far.

Note:

When at 100%, the radio needs to be

power cycled Off and then On to initiate the

firmware upgrade.

Pending Firmware – Download

If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA

Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial

file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if

still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you

want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board

Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

301

English

internal timer, use the Download option as described

below.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to Firmware and press to select.

or to Download and press to select.

The display shows the following:

Download Available Start Download

No Download Availa-

ble

Download not availa‐

ble

7Do one of the following:

•

Select Yes and press to start the

download.

•

Select No and press to return to the

previous menu.

Frequency File

Frequency File Up to Date

Note:

If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if

the radio has partially collected a more recent

frequency file version) the radio displays a list

with additional options; Version, %Received,

and Download.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

302

English

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Frequency and press to select.

The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.

Frequency File Pending – Version

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to Frequency and press to select.

or to Version and press to select.

If there is a pending Frequency File, the display

shows the pending Frequency File version

number.

Frequency File Pending – % Received

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to %Received and press to select.

The screen displays the percentage of frequency

file packets collected so far.

Frequency File Pending – Download

If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA

Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file,

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

303

English

the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still

ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want

the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File

transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use

the Download option as described below.

to access the menu.

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to Updates and press to select.

or to Frequency and press to select.

or to Download and press to select.

Download Currently

Unavailable

Download not avail‐

able

Download Currently

Available

Start Download

7Do one of the following:

•Select Yes and press to start the download.

•Select No and press to return to the previous

menu.

Checking the GPS/GNSS Information

Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio,

such as values of:

• Latitude

• Longitude

•Altitude

• Direction

• Velocity

• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)

• Satellites

• Version

to access the menu.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

304

English

or to Utilities and press to select.

or to Radio Info and press to

select.

or to GPS Info and press to select.

or to the required item and press to

select.

The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS

information.

See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 172 for

details on GPS/GNSS.

Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

305

English

Accessories

306

English

Authorized Accessories List

Antennas

• UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAE4068_)[7]

• UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Slim Whip Antenna

(PMAE4079_)[7]

• UHF, 403 – 450MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4069_)[7]

•UHF, 440 – 490MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4070_[7]

• UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4071_)[7]

• UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4071_)[7]

• VHF, 144 – 165MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4116_)[7]

• VHF, 136 – 155MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4117_)[7]

• VHF, 152 – 174MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4118_)[7]

• VHF, 136 – 148MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4119_)[7]

• VHF, 146 – 160MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4120_)[7]

• VHF, 160 – 174MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4121)[7]

• 800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAF4011_)[8]

• 800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAF4012_)[8]

• 800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Short Whip Antenna

(PMAF4009_)

• 800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Short Whip Antenna

(PMAF4010_)

Batteries

• Core NiMH, 1300 mAh Battery (PMNN4412_)

• Core Slim Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Battery

(PMNN4406_R)

7Applicable to XPR7550 only.

8Applicable to XPR7580 only.

Authorized Accessories List

307

English

• IMPRES Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Slim Battery

(PMNN4407_R)

• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2150 mAh Battery

(PMNN4409_R)

• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2300 mAh Battery

(FM) (NNTN8129_)

•IMPRES Li-Ion, 2700 mAh Battery

(PMNN4448_R)

• IMPRES Li-Ion, 2900 mAh TIA4950 HAZLOC IP68

Battery(PMNN4489_)[9]

• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2500 mAh TIA4950

Submersible IP57 Battery, Intrinsically Safe

(NNTN8560_)

• IMPRES Slim Li-Ion, 2100 mAh IP68 Battery

(PMNN4491_)

• IMPRES Li-Ion, 3000 mAh IP68 Battery, low

voltage (PMNN4493_)

• IMPRES Li-Ion, 3000 mAh IP68 Battery

(PMNN4488_)

Carry Devices

• 2.5-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop

(PMLN5610_)

• 3-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop

(PMLN5611_)

• Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt

Loop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5838_)

•Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Swivel Belt

Loop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5840_)

• Hard Leather Carry Case with 2.5-Inch Swivel Belt

Loop for Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio

(PMLN5842_)

• Nylon Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt Loop for

Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio

(PMLN5844_)

• Belt Clip for 2-Inch Belt Width (PMLN4651_)

• Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width (PMLN7008_)

• Vibrating Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width

(PMLN7296_)

Chargers

• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger (WPLN4212_)

9Applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.

Authorized Accessories List

308

English

• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display

(WPLN4219_)

• IMPRES Single-Unit Charger (WPLN4232_)

• Core Single Unit Charger (NNTN8117_)

•IMPRES Vehicular Charger (NNTN7616_)

• IMPRES Battery Reader (NNTN7392_)

Earbuds and Earpieces

• Receive-Only Earbud (AARLN4885_)

• Receive-Only Earbud (MDRLN4885)

• D-Shell Receive-Only Earpiece (PMLN4620_)

•Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4941_)

• Standard Earpiece, Black (RLN6279_)

• Standard Earpiece, Beige (RLN6280_)

• Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Beige

(RLN6284_)

• Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Black

(RLN6285_)

• Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Beige (RLN6288_)

• Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Black (RLN6289_)

• 1-Wire Earbud, 29cm Cord, Black (NNTN8294_)

• 1-Wire Earbud,116cm Cord, Black (NNTN8295_)

• Over-the-Ear Receiver for Remote Speaker

Microphone (WADN4190_)

• D-Shell Earset (PMLN5096_)

• IMPRES Temple Transducer with In-line Push-to-

Talk (PMLN5101_)

• Replacement Foam Ear Pad and Windscreen

(RLN6283_)

•Replacement Ear Seal Cloth Cover (1580376E32)

• Replacement Boom Mic Windscreen

(5080548E02)

• Replacement Windscreen O-Ring (3280376E35)

• Wireless Earpiece Maintenance Kit (NTN8821_)

• Replacement Ear Tips Kit for Wireless Ear Buds

(NNTN8316_)

• Replacement Ear Tubes for CommPort Earpiece,

Pack of 10 (RLN5037_)

• Ear Straps for CommPort Earpiece (for Secure

Attachment to Ear), Pack of 10 (NTN8988_)

Headsets and Headset Accessories

• Ultra-Lite Headset (PMLN5102_)

• Heavy Duty Noise-Canceling Headset

(PMLN5275_)

• Lightweight Headset (RMN5058_)

Authorized Accessories List

309

English

• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk

Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable

(NNTN8125_)

• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk

Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 9.5-Inch Cable

(NNTN8126_)

• Non-Secure Wireless Push-to-Talk Device

(NNTN8127_)

•Push-to-Talk Module, without Charger

(NNTN8191_)

• Replacement Earpiece 12–Inch Cable (for

NNTN8125_)(NTN2572_)

• Business Wireless Accessory Kit (PMLN6463_)

Remote Speaker Microphones

• Remote Speaker Microphone (PMMN4024_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone

(PMMN4025_)

• Remote Speaker Microphone, Submersible (IP57)

(PMMN4040_)

•IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with

Volume, IP57 (PMMN4046_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with

Earjack, Noise-Canceling (PMMN4050_)

• Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement Coil

Cord Kit (For Use with PMMN4024_ and

PMMN4040_) (RLN6074_)

• Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement Coil

Cord Kit (For Use with PMMN4025_,

PMMN4046_, PMMN4050_) (RLN6075_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, IP57

(NNTN8382_)

•IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with

Earjack (NNTN8383_)

Surveillance Accessories

• Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Black (Single Wire)

(PMLN6125_)

• Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Beige (Single Wire)

(PMLN6126_)

• Surveillance Low Noise Kit (RLN5886_)

•Surveillance High Noise Kit (RLN5887_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Black

(PMLN6127_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Beige

(PMLN6128_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (RLN5882_)

Authorized Accessories List

310

English

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6129_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6130_)

• IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Black (PMLN5097_)

•IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Beige (PMLN5106_)

• IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6123_)

• IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6124_)

• Transparent Acoustic Tube (RLN6242_)

• Replacement Foam Plugs, Pack of 50 (For Use

with RLN5886_) (RLN6281_)

• Replacement Ear Tips, Clear, Pack of 50 (For Use

with RLN5887_) (RLN6282_)

• Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Right

Ear (RLN4760_)

• Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,

Right Ear (RLN4761_)

• Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,

Right Ear (RLN4762_)

• Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left

Ear (RLN4763_)

• Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,

Left Ear (RLN4764_)

• Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left

Ear (RLN4765_)

Miscellaneous Accessories

• Universal Chest Pack (HLN6602_)

• Waterproof Bag, Includes Large Carry Strap

(HLN9985_)

• Shoulder Strap (Attaches to D-Ring on Carry

Case) (NTN5243_)

•Small Clip, Epaulet Strap (RLN4295_)

• Break-A-Way Chest Pack (RLN4570_)

• Universal RadioPAK and Utility Case (Fanny

Pack) (RLN4815_)

• Replacement Strap for RLN4570_ and HLN6602_

Chest Packs (1505596Z02)

• Universal RadioPAK Extension Belt (4280384F89)

• Belt (4200865599)

• Tactical Remote Body Push-to-Talk (PMLN6767_)

• Push-to-Talk Interface Module (PMLN6827_)

• Tactical Remote Ring Push-to-Talk (PMLN6830_)

• Tactical Heavy Duty Temple Transducer with

Noise Cancelling Boom Microphone (PMLN6833_)

Authorized Accessories List

311

English

Maritime Radio Use in the VHF

Frequency Range

Special Channel Assignments

Emergency Channel

If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and

require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16

to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the

United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following

information, in this order:

1“MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.”

2“THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN

__________.” State the name of the vessel in

distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other

identification of the vessel, stated 3 times.

3Repeat “MAYDAY” and the name of the vessel.

4“WE ARE LOCATED AT

_______________________.” State the position

of the vessel in distress, using any information that

will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

• latitude and longitude

• bearing (state whether you are using true or

magnetic north)

•distance to a well-known landmark

• vessel course, speed or destination

5State the nature of the distress.

6Specify what kind of assistance you need.

7State the number of persons on board and the

number needing medical attention, if any.

8Mention any other information that would be

helpful to responders, such as type of vessel,

vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc.

9“OVER.”

10 Wait for a response.

11 If you do not receive an immediate response,

remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at

intervals until you receive a response. Be

prepared to follow any instructions given to you.

Non-Commercial Call Channel

For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing

reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling,

or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9.

Operating Frequency Requirements

A radio designated for shipboard use must comply

with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part

80 as follows:

Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range

312

English

• on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the

Communications Act, the radio must be capable of

operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency.

• on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the

radio must be capable of operating:

• in the simplex mode on the ship station

transmitting frequencies specified in the

156.025 – 157.425 MHz frequency band, and

•in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency

channels specified in the table below.

Note:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82,

and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general

public in US waters.

Additional information about operating

requirements in the Maritime Services can be

obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80

and from the US Coast Guard.

Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List

Channel Num-

ber

Frequency (MHz)

Transmit Receive

1 156.050 160.650

2 156.100 160.700

* 156.150 160.750

4 156.200 160.800

5 156.250 160.850

6 156.300 –

7 156.350 160.950

8 156.400 –

9 156.450 156.450

10 156.500 156.500

11 156.550 156.550

12 156.600 156.600

13** 156.650 156.650

14 156.700 156.700

15** 156.750 156.750

16 156.800 156.800

17** 156.850 156.850

Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range

313

English

18 156.900 161.500

19 156.950 161.550

20 157.000 161.600

* 157.050 161.650

22 157.100 161.700

* 157.150 161.750

24 157.200 161.800

25 157.250 161.850

26 157.300 161.900

27 157.350 161.950

28 157.400 162.000

60 156.025 160.625

* 156.075 160.675

62 156.125 160.725

63 156.175 160.775

* 156.225 160.825

65 156.275 160.875

66 156.325 160.925

67** 156.375 156.375

68 156.425 156.425

69 156.475 156.475

71 156.575 156.575

72 156.625 –

73 156.675 156.675

74 156.725 156.725

75 *** ***

76 *** ***

77** 156.875 –

78 156.925 161.525

79 156.975 161.575

80 157.025 161.625

* 157.075 161.675

* 157.125 161.725

* 157.175 161.775

Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range

314

English

84 157.225 161.825

85 157.275 161.875

86 157.325 161.925

87 157.375 161.975

88 157.425 162.025

Note:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82,

and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the

general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band.

Note:

A – in the Receive column indicates that the

channel is transmit only.

Declaration of Compliance for the Use of

Distress and Safety Frequencies

The radio equipment does not employ a modulation

other than the internationally adopted modulation for

maritime use when it operates on the distress and

safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3.

Technical Parameters for Interfacing External

Data Sources

RS232 USB SB9600

Input Volt-

age (Volts

Peak-to-

peak)

18V 3.6V 5V

Max Data

Rate

28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s

Impedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm

Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range

315

English

Batteries and Chargers Warranty

The Workmanship Warranty

The workmanship warranty guarantees against

defects in workmanship under normal use and

service.

All MOTOTRBO Batter-

ies

24 Months

IMPRES Chargers (Sin-

gle-Unit and Multi-Unit,

Non-Display)

24 Months

IMPRES Chargers (Multi-

Unit with Display)

12 Months

The Capacity Warranty

The capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the rated

capacity for the warranty duration.

Nickel Metal-Hydride

(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-

lon) Batteries

12 Months

IMPRES Batteries, When

Used Exclusively with

IMPRES Chargers

18 Months

Batteries and Chargers Warranty

316

English

Limited Warranty

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS

I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR

HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“MOTOROLA”)

warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured

Communication Products listed below (“Product”)

against defects in material and workmanship under

normal use and service for a period of time from the

date of purchase as scheduled below:

XPR Series Digital Porta-

ble Radios

36 Months

Product Accessories (Ex-

cluding Batteries and

Chargers)

12 Months

MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either

repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts),

replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or

refund the purchase price of the Product during the

warranty period provided it is returned in accordance

with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or

boards are warranted for the balance of the original

applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of

Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA.

This express limited warranty is extended by

MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only

and is not assignable or transferable to any other

party. This is the complete warranty for the Product

manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA

assumes no obligations or liability for additions or

modifications to this warranty unless made in writing

and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.

Unless made in a separate agreement between

MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser,

MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,

maintenance or service of the Product.

MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for

any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA

which is attached to or used in connection with the

Product, or for operation of the Product with any

ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is

expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each

system which may use the Product is unique,

MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or

Limited Warranty

317

English

operation of the system as a whole under this

warranty.

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of

MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product.

Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price,

at MOTOROLA’s option, is the exclusive remedy.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL

OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS

LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL

MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN

EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE

PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF

TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS,

LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR

INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE

FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY

LAW.

III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION

OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON

HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO

THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY

NOT APPLY.

This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there

may be other rights which may vary from state to

state.

IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date

of purchase and Product item serial number) in order

to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send

the Product item, transportation and insurance

prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.

Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA

through one of its authorized warranty service

locations. If you first contact the company which sold

you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication

service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining

warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at

1-800-927-2744 US/Canada.

Limited Warranty

318

English

V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT

COVER:

1Defects or damage resulting from use of the

Product in other than its normal and customary

manner.

2Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water,

or neglect.

3Defects or damage from improper testing,

operation, maintenance, installation, alteration,

modification, or adjustment.

4Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused

directly by defects in material workmanship.

5A Product subjected to unauthorized Product

modifications, disassembles or repairs (including,

without limitation, the addition to the Product of

non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which

adversely affect performance of the Product or

interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty

inspection and testing of the Product to verify any

warranty claim.

6Product which has had the serial number removed

or made illegible.

7Rechargeable batteries if:

• any of the seals on the battery enclosure of

cells are broken or show evidence of

tampering.

• the damage or defect is caused by charging or

using the battery in equipment or service other

than the Product for which it is specified.

8Freight costs to the repair depot.

9A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized

alteration of the software/firmware in the Product,

does not function in accordance with

MOTOROLA’s published specifications or the FCC

certification labeling in effect for the Product at the

time the Product was initially distributed from

MOTOROLA.

10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product

surfaces that does not affect the operation of the

Product.

11 Normal and customary wear and tear.

VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit

brought against the end user purchaser to the extent

that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts

infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will

pay those costs and damages finally awarded against

Limited Warranty

319

English

the end user purchaser in any such suit which are

attributable to any such claim, but such defense and

payments are conditioned on the following:

1that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in

writing by such purchaser of any notice of such

claim,

2that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the

defense of such suit and all negotiations for its

settlement or compromise, and

3should the Product or parts become, or in

MOTOROLA’s opinion be likely to become, the

subject of a claim of infringement of a United

States patent, that such purchaser will permit

MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to

procure for such purchaser the right to continue

using the Product or parts or to replace or modify

the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to

grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or

parts as depreciated and accept its return. The

depreciation will be an equal amount per year over

the lifetime of the Product or parts as established

by MOTOROLA.

MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any

claim of patent infringement which is based upon the

combination of the Product or parts furnished

hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not

furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have

any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or

software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is

attached to or used in connection with the Product.

The foregoing states the entire liability of

MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents

by the Product or any parts thereof.

Laws in the United States and other countries

preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for

copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the

exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute

copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA

software may be used in only the Product in which

the software was originally embodied and such

software in such Product may not be replaced,

copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to

produce any derivative thereof. No other use

including, without limitation, alteration, modification,

reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of

such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in

such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is

granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under

MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.

Limited Warranty

320

English

VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of

Illinois, U.S.A.

Limited Warranty

321

English

Motorola Solutions, Inc.

1303 East Algonquin Road

Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A.

MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and

the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks

of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

November 2015

www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo

*68009502001*

68009502001-HC

Motorola Solutions 89FT7066 Portable 2-Way Radio User Manual MOTOTRBO Professional Digital Two Way Radio System

Motorola Solutions, Inc. Portable 2-Way Radio MOTOTRBO Professional Digital Two Way Radio System

Contents

Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation